blob: 4cafff8a1a46bd6220e7ccd231bb0f9379ed4b39 [file] [log] [blame]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001 ----------------------
2 HAProxy
3 Configuration Manual
4 ----------------------
Willy Tarreau79158882009-06-09 11:59:08 +02005 version 1.4
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02006 willy tarreau
Willy Tarreauc82a9e52009-10-12 06:40:53 +02007 2009/10/12
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02008
9
10This document covers the configuration language as implemented in the version
11specified above. It does not provide any hint, example or advice. For such
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +010012documentation, please refer to the Reference Manual or the Architecture Manual.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020013The summary below is meant to help you search sections by name and navigate
14through the document.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +020015
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020016Note to documentation contributors :
17 This document is formated with 80 columns per line, with even number of
18 spaces for indentation and without tabs. Please follow these rules strictly
19 so that it remains easily printable everywhere. If a line needs to be
20 printed verbatim and does not fit, please end each line with a backslash
21 ('\') and continue on next line. If you add sections, please update the
22 summary below for easier searching.
23
24
25Summary
26-------
27
281. Quick reminder about HTTP
291.1. The HTTP transaction model
301.2. HTTP request
311.2.1. The Request line
321.2.2. The request headers
331.3. HTTP response
341.3.1. The Response line
351.3.2. The response headers
36
372. Configuring HAProxy
382.1. Configuration file format
392.2. Time format
40
413. Global parameters
423.1. Process management and security
433.2. Performance tuning
443.3. Debugging
45
464. Proxies
474.1. Proxy keywords matrix
484.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
49
505. Server options
51
526. HTTP header manipulation
53
547. Using ACLs
557.1. Matching integers
567.2. Matching strings
577.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
587.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
597.5. Available matching criteria
607.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
617.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
627.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
637.6. Pre-defined ACLs
647.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
65
668. Logging
678.1. Log levels
688.2. Log formats
698.2.1. Default log format
708.2.2. TCP log format
718.2.3. HTTP log format
728.3. Advanced logging options
738.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
748.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
758.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
768.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
778.4. Timing events
788.5. Session state at disconnection
798.6. Non-printable characters
808.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
818.8. Capturing HTTP headers
828.9. Examples of logs
83
849. Statistics and monitoring
859.1. CSV format
869.2. Unix Socket commands
87
88
891. Quick reminder about HTTP
90----------------------------
91
92When haproxy is running in HTTP mode, both the request and the response are
93fully analyzed and indexed, thus it becomes possible to build matching criteria
94on almost anything found in the contents.
95
96However, it is important to understand how HTTP requests and responses are
97formed, and how HAProxy decomposes them. It will then become easier to write
98correct rules and to debug existing configurations.
99
100
1011.1. The HTTP transaction model
102-------------------------------
103
104The HTTP protocol is transaction-driven. This means that each request will lead
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100105to one and only one response. Traditionally, a TCP connection is established
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200106from the client to the server, a request is sent by the client on the
107connection, the server responds and the connection is closed. A new request
108will involve a new connection :
109
110 [CON1] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [CLO1] [CON2] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO2] ...
111
112In this mode, called the "HTTP close" mode, there are as many connection
113establishments as there are HTTP transactions. Since the connection is closed
114by the server after the response, the client does not need to know the content
115length.
116
117Due to the transactional nature of the protocol, it was possible to improve it
118to avoid closing a connection between two subsequent transactions. In this mode
119however, it is mandatory that the server indicates the content length for each
120response so that the client does not wait indefinitely. For this, a special
121header is used: "Content-length". This mode is called the "keep-alive" mode :
122
123 [CON] [REQ1] ... [RESP1] [REQ2] ... [RESP2] [CLO] ...
124
125Its advantages are a reduced latency between transactions, and less processing
126power required on the server side. It is generally better than the close mode,
127but not always because the clients often limit their concurrent connections to
128a smaller value. HAProxy currently does not support the HTTP keep-alive mode,
129but knows how to transform it to the close mode.
130
131A last improvement in the communications is the pipelining mode. It still uses
132keep-alive, but the client does not wait for the first response to send the
133second request. This is useful for fetching large number of images composing a
134page :
135
136 [CON] [REQ1] [REQ2] ... [RESP1] [RESP2] [CLO] ...
137
138This can obviously have a tremendous benefit on performance because the network
139latency is eliminated between subsequent requests. Many HTTP agents do not
140correctly support pipelining since there is no way to associate a response with
141the corresponding request in HTTP. For this reason, it is mandatory for the
142server to reply in the exact same order as the requests were received.
143
144Right now, HAProxy only supports the first mode (HTTP close) if it needs to
145process the request. This means that for each request, there will be one TCP
146connection. If keep-alive or pipelining are required, HAProxy will still
147support them, but will only see the first request and the first response of
148each transaction. While this is generally problematic with regards to logs,
149content switching or filtering, it most often causes no problem for persistence
150with cookie insertion.
151
152
1531.2. HTTP request
154-----------------
155
156First, let's consider this HTTP request :
157
158 Line Contents
159 number
160 1 GET /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2 HTTP/1.1
161 2 Host: www.mydomain.com
162 3 User-agent: my small browser
163 4 Accept: image/jpeg, image/gif
164 5 Accept: image/png
165
166
1671.2.1. The Request line
168-----------------------
169
170Line 1 is the "request line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
171
172 - a METHOD : GET
173 - a URI : /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
174 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
175
176All of them are delimited by what the standard calls LWS (linear white spaces),
177which are commonly spaces, but can also be tabs or line feeds/carriage returns
178followed by spaces/tabs. The method itself cannot contain any colon (':') and
179is limited to alphabetic letters. All those various combinations make it
180desirable that HAProxy performs the splitting itself rather than leaving it to
181the user to write a complex or inaccurate regular expression.
182
183The URI itself can have several forms :
184
185 - A "relative URI" :
186
187 /serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
188
189 It is a complete URL without the host part. This is generally what is
190 received by servers, reverse proxies and transparent proxies.
191
192 - An "absolute URI", also called a "URL" :
193
194 http://192.168.0.12:8080/serv/login.php?lang=en&profile=2
195
196 It is composed of a "scheme" (the protocol name followed by '://'), a host
197 name or address, optionally a colon (':') followed by a port number, then
198 a relative URI beginning at the first slash ('/') after the address part.
199 This is generally what proxies receive, but a server supporting HTTP/1.1
200 must accept this form too.
201
202 - a star ('*') : this form is only accepted in association with the OPTIONS
203 method and is not relayable. It is used to inquiry a next hop's
204 capabilities.
205
206 - an address:port combination : 192.168.0.12:80
207 This is used with the CONNECT method, which is used to establish TCP
208 tunnels through HTTP proxies, generally for HTTPS, but sometimes for
209 other protocols too.
210
211In a relative URI, two sub-parts are identified. The part before the question
212mark is called the "path". It is typically the relative path to static objects
213on the server. The part after the question mark is called the "query string".
214It is mostly used with GET requests sent to dynamic scripts and is very
215specific to the language, framework or application in use.
216
217
2181.2.2. The request headers
219--------------------------
220
221The headers start at the second line. They are composed of a name at the
222beginning of the line, immediately followed by a colon (':'). Traditionally,
223an LWS is added after the colon but that's not required. Then come the values.
224Multiple identical headers may be folded into one single line, delimiting the
225values with commas, provided that their order is respected. This is commonly
226encountered in the "Cookie:" field. A header may span over multiple lines if
227the subsequent lines begin with an LWS. In the example in 1.2, lines 4 and 5
228define a total of 3 values for the "Accept:" header.
229
230Contrary to a common mis-conception, header names are not case-sensitive, and
231their values are not either if they refer to other header names (such as the
232"Connection:" header).
233
234The end of the headers is indicated by the first empty line. People often say
235that it's a double line feed, which is not exact, even if a double line feed
236is one valid form of empty line.
237
238Fortunately, HAProxy takes care of all these complex combinations when indexing
239headers, checking values and counting them, so there is no reason to worry
240about the way they could be written, but it is important not to accuse an
241application of being buggy if it does unusual, valid things.
242
243Important note:
244 As suggested by RFC2616, HAProxy normalizes headers by replacing line breaks
245 in the middle of headers by LWS in order to join multi-line headers. This
246 is necessary for proper analysis and helps less capable HTTP parsers to work
247 correctly and not to be fooled by such complex constructs.
248
249
2501.3. HTTP response
251------------------
252
253An HTTP response looks very much like an HTTP request. Both are called HTTP
254messages. Let's consider this HTTP response :
255
256 Line Contents
257 number
258 1 HTTP/1.1 200 OK
259 2 Content-length: 350
260 3 Content-Type: text/html
261
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200262As a special case, HTTP supports so called "Informational responses" as status
263codes 1xx. These messages are special in that they don't convey any part of the
264response, they're just used as sort of a signaling message to ask a client to
265continue to post its request for instance. The requested information will be
266carried by the next non-1xx response message following the informational one.
267This implies that multiple responses may be sent to a single request, and that
268this only works when keep-alive is enabled (1xx messages are HTTP/1.1 only).
269HAProxy handles these messages and is able to correctly forward and skip them,
270and only process the next non-1xx response. As such, these messages are neither
271logged nor transformed, unless explicitly state otherwise.
272
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200273
2741.3.1. The Response line
275------------------------
276
277Line 1 is the "response line". It is always composed of 3 fields :
278
279 - a version tag : HTTP/1.1
280 - a status code : 200
281 - a reason : OK
282
283The status code is always 3-digit. The first digit indicates a general status :
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +0200284 - 1xx = informational message to be skipped (eg: 100, 101)
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200285 - 2xx = OK, content is following (eg: 200, 206)
286 - 3xx = OK, no content following (eg: 302, 304)
287 - 4xx = error caused by the client (eg: 401, 403, 404)
288 - 5xx = error caused by the server (eg: 500, 502, 503)
289
290Please refer to RFC2616 for the detailed meaning of all such codes. The
291"reason" field is just a hint, but is not parsed by clients. Anything can be
292found there, but it's a common practice to respect the well-established
293messages. It can be composed of one or multiple words, such as "OK", "Found",
294or "Authentication Required".
295
296Haproxy may emit the following status codes by itself :
297
298 Code When / reason
299 200 access to stats page, and when replying to monitoring requests
300 301 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
301 302 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
302 303 when performing a redirection, depending on the configured code
303 400 for an invalid or too large request
304 401 when an authentication is required to perform the action (when
305 accessing the stats page)
306 403 when a request is forbidden by a "block" ACL or "reqdeny" filter
307 408 when the request timeout strikes before the request is complete
308 500 when haproxy encounters an unrecoverable internal error, such as a
309 memory allocation failure, which should never happen
310 502 when the server returns an empty, invalid or incomplete response, or
311 when an "rspdeny" filter blocks the response.
312 503 when no server was available to handle the request, or in response to
313 monitoring requests which match the "monitor fail" condition
314 504 when the response timeout strikes before the server responds
315
316The error 4xx and 5xx codes above may be customized (see "errorloc" in section
3174.2).
318
319
3201.3.2. The response headers
321---------------------------
322
323Response headers work exactly like request headers, and as such, HAProxy uses
324the same parsing function for both. Please refer to paragraph 1.2.2 for more
325details.
326
327
3282. Configuring HAProxy
329----------------------
330
3312.1. Configuration file format
332------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200333
334HAProxy's configuration process involves 3 major sources of parameters :
335
336 - the arguments from the command-line, which always take precedence
337 - the "global" section, which sets process-wide parameters
338 - the proxies sections which can take form of "defaults", "listen",
339 "frontend" and "backend".
340
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100341The configuration file syntax consists in lines beginning with a keyword
342referenced in this manual, optionally followed by one or several parameters
343delimited by spaces. If spaces have to be entered in strings, then they must be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100344preceded by a backslash ('\') to be escaped. Backslashes also have to be
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100345escaped by doubling them.
346
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200347
3482.2. Time format
349----------------
350
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100351Some parameters involve values representing time, such as timeouts. These
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100352values are generally expressed in milliseconds (unless explicitly stated
353otherwise) but may be expressed in any other unit by suffixing the unit to the
354numeric value. It is important to consider this because it will not be repeated
355for every keyword. Supported units are :
356
357 - us : microseconds. 1 microsecond = 1/1000000 second
358 - ms : milliseconds. 1 millisecond = 1/1000 second. This is the default.
359 - s : seconds. 1s = 1000ms
360 - m : minutes. 1m = 60s = 60000ms
361 - h : hours. 1h = 60m = 3600s = 3600000ms
362 - d : days. 1d = 24h = 1440m = 86400s = 86400000ms
363
364
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003653. Global parameters
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200366--------------------
367
368Parameters in the "global" section are process-wide and often OS-specific. They
369are generally set once for all and do not need being changed once correct. Some
370of them have command-line equivalents.
371
372The following keywords are supported in the "global" section :
373
374 * Process management and security
375 - chroot
376 - daemon
377 - gid
378 - group
379 - log
380 - nbproc
381 - pidfile
382 - uid
383 - ulimit-n
384 - user
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200385 - stats
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200386 - node
387 - description
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200388
389 * Performance tuning
390 - maxconn
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100391 - maxpipes
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200392 - noepoll
393 - nokqueue
394 - nopoll
395 - nosepoll
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100396 - nosplice
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200397 - spread-checks
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200398 - tune.bufsize
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100399 - tune.maxaccept
400 - tune.maxpollevents
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200401 - tune.maxrewrite
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200402
403 * Debugging
404 - debug
405 - quiet
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200406
407
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004083.1. Process management and security
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200409------------------------------------
410
411chroot <jail dir>
412 Changes current directory to <jail dir> and performs a chroot() there before
413 dropping privileges. This increases the security level in case an unknown
414 vulnerability would be exploited, since it would make it very hard for the
415 attacker to exploit the system. This only works when the process is started
416 with superuser privileges. It is important to ensure that <jail_dir> is both
417 empty and unwritable to anyone.
418
419daemon
420 Makes the process fork into background. This is the recommended mode of
421 operation. It is equivalent to the command line "-D" argument. It can be
422 disabled by the command line "-db" argument.
423
424gid <number>
425 Changes the process' group ID to <number>. It is recommended that the group
426 ID is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
427 be started with a user belonging to this group, or with superuser privileges.
428 See also "group" and "uid".
429
430group <group name>
431 Similar to "gid" but uses the GID of group name <group name> from /etc/group.
432 See also "gid" and "user".
433
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200434log <address> <facility> [max level [min level]]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200435 Adds a global syslog server. Up to two global servers can be defined. They
436 will receive logs for startups and exits, as well as all logs from proxies
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100437 configured with "log global".
438
439 <address> can be one of:
440
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +0100441 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon and a UDP port. If
Robert Tsai81ae1952007-12-05 10:47:29 +0100442 no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the standard syslog
443 port).
444
445 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
446 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible inside
447 the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is appropriately
448 writeable).
449
450 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200451
452 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
453 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
454 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
455
456 An optional level can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By default,
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +0200457 all messages are sent. If a maximum level is specified, only messages with a
458 severity at least as important as this level will be sent. An optional minimum
459 level can be specified. If it is set, logs emitted with a more severe level
460 than this one will be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending
461 "emerg" messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
462 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200463
464 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
465
466nbproc <number>
467 Creates <number> processes when going daemon. This requires the "daemon"
468 mode. By default, only one process is created, which is the recommended mode
469 of operation. For systems limited to small sets of file descriptors per
470 process, it may be needed to fork multiple daemons. USING MULTIPLE PROCESSES
471 IS HARDER TO DEBUG AND IS REALLY DISCOURAGED. See also "daemon".
472
473pidfile <pidfile>
474 Writes pids of all daemons into file <pidfile>. This option is equivalent to
475 the "-p" command line argument. The file must be accessible to the user
476 starting the process. See also "daemon".
477
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200478stats socket <path> [{uid | user} <uid>] [{gid | group} <gid>] [mode <mode>]
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200479 [level <level>]
480
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200481 Creates a UNIX socket in stream mode at location <path>. Any previously
482 existing socket will be backed up then replaced. Connections to this socket
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100483 will return various statistics outputs and even allow some commands to be
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +0200484 issued. Please consult section 9.2 "Unix Socket commands" for more details.
485
486 An optional "level" parameter can be specified to restrict the nature of
487 the commands that can be issued on the socket :
488 - "user" is the least privileged level ; only non-sensitive stats can be
489 read, and no change is allowed. It would make sense on systems where it
490 is not easy to restrict access to the socket.
491
492 - "operator" is the default level and fits most common uses. All data can
493 be read, and only non-sensible changes are permitted (eg: clear max
494 counters).
495
496 - "admin" should be used with care, as everything is permitted (eg: clear
497 all counters).
Willy Tarreaua8efd362008-01-03 10:19:15 +0100498
499 On platforms which support it, it is possible to restrict access to this
500 socket by specifying numerical IDs after "uid" and "gid", or valid user and
501 group names after the "user" and "group" keywords. It is also possible to
502 restrict permissions on the socket by passing an octal value after the "mode"
503 keyword (same syntax as chmod). Depending on the platform, the permissions on
504 the socket will be inherited from the directory which hosts it, or from the
505 user the process is started with.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200506
507stats timeout <timeout, in milliseconds>
508 The default timeout on the stats socket is set to 10 seconds. It is possible
509 to change this value with "stats timeout". The value must be passed in
Willy Tarreaubefdff12007-12-02 22:27:38 +0100510 milliseconds, or be suffixed by a time unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }.
Willy Tarreaufbee7132007-10-18 13:53:22 +0200511
512stats maxconn <connections>
513 By default, the stats socket is limited to 10 concurrent connections. It is
514 possible to change this value with "stats maxconn".
515
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200516uid <number>
517 Changes the process' user ID to <number>. It is recommended that the user ID
518 is dedicated to HAProxy or to a small set of similar daemons. HAProxy must
519 be started with superuser privileges in order to be able to switch to another
520 one. See also "gid" and "user".
521
522ulimit-n <number>
523 Sets the maximum number of per-process file-descriptors to <number>. By
524 default, it is automatically computed, so it is recommended not to use this
525 option.
526
527user <user name>
528 Similar to "uid" but uses the UID of user name <user name> from /etc/passwd.
529 See also "uid" and "group".
530
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200531node <name>
532 Only letters, digits, hyphen and underscore are allowed, like in DNS names.
533
534 This statement is useful in HA configurations where two or more processes or
535 servers share the same IP address. By setting a different node-name on all
536 nodes, it becomes easy to immediately spot what server is handling the
537 traffic.
538
539description <text>
540 Add a text that describes the instance.
541
542 Please note that it is required to escape certain characters (# for example)
543 and this text is inserted into a html page so you should avoid using
544 "<" and ">" characters.
545
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200546
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005473.2. Performance tuning
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200548-----------------------
549
550maxconn <number>
551 Sets the maximum per-process number of concurrent connections to <number>. It
552 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-n". Proxies will stop accepting
553 connections when this limit is reached. The "ulimit-n" parameter is
554 automatically adjusted according to this value. See also "ulimit-n".
555
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100556maxpipes <number>
557 Sets the maximum per-process number of pipes to <number>. Currently, pipes
558 are only used by kernel-based tcp splicing. Since a pipe contains two file
559 descriptors, the "ulimit-n" value will be increased accordingly. The default
560 value is maxconn/4, which seems to be more than enough for most heavy usages.
561 The splice code dynamically allocates and releases pipes, and can fall back
562 to standard copy, so setting this value too low may only impact performance.
563
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200564noepoll
565 Disables the use of the "epoll" event polling system on Linux. It is
566 equivalent to the command-line argument "-de". The next polling system
567 used will generally be "poll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
568
569nokqueue
570 Disables the use of the "kqueue" event polling system on BSD. It is
571 equivalent to the command-line argument "-dk". The next polling system
572 used will generally be "poll". See also "nopoll".
573
574nopoll
575 Disables the use of the "poll" event polling system. It is equivalent to the
576 command-line argument "-dp". The next polling system used will be "select".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100577 It should never be needed to disable "poll" since it's available on all
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200578 platforms supported by HAProxy. See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll" and
579 "nokqueue".
580
581nosepoll
582 Disables the use of the "speculative epoll" event polling system on Linux. It
583 is equivalent to the command-line argument "-ds". The next polling system
584 used will generally be "epoll". See also "nosepoll", and "nopoll".
585
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100586nosplice
587 Disables the use of kernel tcp splicing between sockets on Linux. It is
588 equivalent to the command line argument "-dS". Data will then be copied
589 using conventional and more portable recv/send calls. Kernel tcp splicing is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100590 limited to some very recent instances of kernel 2.6. Most versions between
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100591 2.6.25 and 2.6.28 are buggy and will forward corrupted data, so they must not
592 be used. This option makes it easier to globally disable kernel splicing in
593 case of doubt. See also "option splice-auto", "option splice-request" and
594 "option splice-response".
595
Willy Tarreaufe255b72007-10-14 23:09:26 +0200596spread-checks <0..50, in percent>
597 Sometimes it is desirable to avoid sending health checks to servers at exact
598 intervals, for instance when many logical servers are located on the same
599 physical server. With the help of this parameter, it becomes possible to add
600 some randomness in the check interval between 0 and +/- 50%. A value between
601 2 and 5 seems to show good results. The default value remains at 0.
602
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200603tune.bufsize <number>
604 Sets the buffer size to this size (in bytes). Lower values allow more
605 sessions to coexist in the same amount of RAM, and higher values allow some
606 applications with very large cookies to work. The default value is 16384 and
607 can be changed at build time. It is strongly recommended not to change this
608 from the default value, as very low values will break some services such as
609 statistics, and values larger than default size will increase memory usage,
610 possibly causing the system to run out of memory. At least the global maxconn
611 parameter should be decreased by the same factor as this one is increased.
612
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100613tune.maxaccept <number>
614 Sets the maximum number of consecutive accepts that a process may perform on
615 a single wake up. High values give higher priority to high connection rates,
616 while lower values give higher priority to already established connections.
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100617 This value is limited to 100 by default in single process mode. However, in
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100618 multi-process mode (nbproc > 1), it defaults to 8 so that when one process
619 wakes up, it does not take all incoming connections for itself and leaves a
Willy Tarreauf49d1df2009-03-01 08:35:41 +0100620 part of them to other processes. Setting this value to -1 completely disables
Willy Tarreaua0250ba2008-01-06 11:22:57 +0100621 the limitation. It should normally not be needed to tweak this value.
622
623tune.maxpollevents <number>
624 Sets the maximum amount of events that can be processed at once in a call to
625 the polling system. The default value is adapted to the operating system. It
626 has been noticed that reducing it below 200 tends to slightly decrease
627 latency at the expense of network bandwidth, and increasing it above 200
628 tends to trade latency for slightly increased bandwidth.
629
Willy Tarreau27a674e2009-08-17 07:23:33 +0200630tune.maxrewrite <number>
631 Sets the reserved buffer space to this size in bytes. The reserved space is
632 used for header rewriting or appending. The first reads on sockets will never
633 fill more than bufsize-maxrewrite. Historically it has defaulted to half of
634 bufsize, though that does not make much sense since there are rarely large
635 numbers of headers to add. Setting it too high prevents processing of large
636 requests or responses. Setting it too low prevents addition of new headers
637 to already large requests or to POST requests. It is generally wise to set it
638 to about 1024. It is automatically readjusted to half of bufsize if it is
639 larger than that. This means you don't have to worry about it when changing
640 bufsize.
641
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200642
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006433.3. Debugging
644--------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200645
646debug
647 Enables debug mode which dumps to stdout all exchanges, and disables forking
648 into background. It is the equivalent of the command-line argument "-d". It
649 should never be used in a production configuration since it may prevent full
650 system startup.
651
652quiet
653 Do not display any message during startup. It is equivalent to the command-
654 line argument "-q".
655
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200656
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006574. Proxies
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200658----------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100659
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200660Proxy configuration can be located in a set of sections :
661 - defaults <name>
662 - frontend <name>
663 - backend <name>
664 - listen <name>
665
666A "defaults" section sets default parameters for all other sections following
667its declaration. Those default parameters are reset by the next "defaults"
668section. See below for the list of parameters which can be set in a "defaults"
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100669section. The name is optional but its use is encouraged for better readability.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200670
671A "frontend" section describes a set of listening sockets accepting client
672connections.
673
674A "backend" section describes a set of servers to which the proxy will connect
675to forward incoming connections.
676
677A "listen" section defines a complete proxy with its frontend and backend
678parts combined in one section. It is generally useful for TCP-only traffic.
679
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100680All proxy names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits,
681'-' (dash), '_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are
682case-sensitive, which means that "www" and "WWW" are two different proxies.
683
684Historically, all proxy names could overlap, it just caused troubles in the
685logs. Since the introduction of content switching, it is mandatory that two
686proxies with overlapping capabilities (frontend/backend) have different names.
687However, it is still permitted that a frontend and a backend share the same
688name, as this configuration seems to be commonly encountered.
689
690Right now, two major proxy modes are supported : "tcp", also known as layer 4,
691and "http", also known as layer 7. In layer 4 mode, HAProxy simply forwards
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +0100692bidirectional traffic between two sides. In layer 7 mode, HAProxy analyzes the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100693protocol, and can interact with it by allowing, blocking, switching, adding,
694modifying, or removing arbitrary contents in requests or responses, based on
695arbitrary criteria.
696
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100697
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006984.1. Proxy keywords matrix
699--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100700
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200701The following list of keywords is supported. Most of them may only be used in a
702limited set of section types. Some of them are marked as "deprecated" because
703they are inherited from an old syntax which may be confusing or functionally
704limited, and there are new recommended keywords to replace them. Keywords
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200705listed with [no] can be optionally inverted using the "no" prefix, eg. "no
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200706option contstats". This makes sense when the option has been enabled by default
Willy Tarreau3842f002009-06-14 11:39:52 +0200707and must be disabled for a specific instance. Such options may also be prefixed
708with "default" in order to restore default settings regardless of what has been
709specified in a previous "defaults" section.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100710
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200711
712keyword defaults frontend listen backend
713----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
714acl - X X X
715appsession - - X X
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +0100716backlog X X X -
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100717balance X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200718bind - X X -
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +0100719bind-process X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200720block - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100721capture cookie - X X -
722capture request header - X X -
723capture response header - X X -
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100724clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100725contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200726cookie X - X X
727default_backend - X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +0200728description - X X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100729disabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200730dispatch - - X X
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100731enabled X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200732errorfile X X X X
733errorloc X X X X
734errorloc302 X X X X
735errorloc303 X X X X
736fullconn X - X X
737grace - X X X
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +0200738hash-type X - X X
Willy Tarreaudbc36f62007-11-30 12:29:11 +0100739http-check disable-on-404 X - X X
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +0200740id - X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200741log X X X X
742maxconn X X X -
743mode X X X X
Willy Tarreauc7246fc2007-12-02 17:31:20 +0100744monitor fail - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200745monitor-net X X X -
746monitor-uri X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100747[no] option abortonclose X - X X
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +0200748[no] option accept-invalid-
749 http-request X X X -
750[no] option accept-invalid-
751 http-response X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100752[no] option allbackups X - X X
753[no] option checkcache X - X X
754[no] option clitcpka X X X -
755[no] option contstats X X X -
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +0200756[no] option dontlog-normal X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100757[no] option dontlognull X X X -
758[no] option forceclose X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200759option forwardfor X X X X
760option httpchk X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100761[no] option httpclose X X X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200762option httplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200763[no] option http_proxy X X X X
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +0200764[no] option independant-
765 streams X X X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki213014e2009-09-27 15:50:02 +0200766[no] option log-health- X - X X
767 checks
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +0200768[no] option log-separate-
769 errors X X X -
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100770[no] option logasap X X X -
771[no] option nolinger X X X X
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +0200772option originalto X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100773[no] option persist X - X X
774[no] option redispatch X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200775option smtpchk X - X X
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +0200776[no] option socket-stats X X X -
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +0100777[no] option splice-auto X X X X
778[no] option splice-request X X X X
779[no] option splice-response X X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100780[no] option srvtcpka X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200781option ssl-hello-chk X - X X
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +0200782[no] option tcp-smart-
783 accept X X X -
Willy Tarreau39bb9be2009-10-17 16:04:09 +0200784[no] option tcp-smart-
785 connect X - X X
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200786option tcpka X X X X
787option tcplog X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100788[no] option transparent X - X X
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +0200789persist rdp-cookie X - X X
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +0100790rate-limit sessions X X X -
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +0200791redirect - X X X
Krzysztof Oledzki336d4752007-12-25 02:40:22 +0100792redisp X - X X (deprecated)
793redispatch X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200794reqadd - X X X
795reqallow - X X X
796reqdel - X X X
797reqdeny - X X X
798reqiallow - X X X
799reqidel - X X X
800reqideny - X X X
801reqipass - X X X
802reqirep - X X X
803reqisetbe - X X X
804reqitarpit - X X X
805reqpass - X X X
806reqrep - X X X
807reqsetbe - X X X
808reqtarpit - X X X
809retries X - X X
810rspadd - X X X
811rspdel - X X X
812rspdeny - X X X
813rspidel - X X X
814rspideny - X X X
815rspirep - X X X
816rsprep - X X X
817server - - X X
818source X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100819srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200820stats auth X - X X
821stats enable X - X X
822stats realm X - X X
Willy Tarreaubbd42122007-07-25 07:26:38 +0200823stats refresh X - X X
Willy Tarreau24e779b2007-07-24 23:43:37 +0200824stats scope X - X X
825stats uri X - X X
Krzysztof Oledzkid9db9272007-10-15 10:05:11 +0200826stats hide-version X - X X
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +0200827tcp-request content accept - X X -
828tcp-request content reject - X X -
829tcp-request inspect-delay - X X -
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +0100830timeout check X - X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100831timeout client X X X -
832timeout clitimeout X X X - (deprecated)
833timeout connect X - X X
834timeout contimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +0200835timeout http-request X X X X
Willy Tarreaue219db72007-12-03 01:30:13 +0100836timeout queue X - X X
837timeout server X - X X
838timeout srvtimeout X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau51c9bde2008-01-06 13:40:03 +0100839timeout tarpit X X X X
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +0100840transparent X - X X (deprecated)
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200841use_backend - X X -
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +0200842----------------------+----------+----------+---------+---------
843keyword defaults frontend listen backend
844
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100845
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02008464.2. Alphabetically sorted keywords reference
847---------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100848
849This section provides a description of each keyword and its usage.
850
851
852acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
853 Declare or complete an access list.
854 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
855 no | yes | yes | yes
856 Example:
857 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
858 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
859 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
860
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +0200861 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100862
863
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100864appsession <cookie> len <length> timeout <holdtime>
865 [request-learn] [prefix] [mode <path-parameters|query-string>]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100866 Define session stickiness on an existing application cookie.
867 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
868 no | no | yes | yes
869 Arguments :
870 <cookie> this is the name of the cookie used by the application and which
871 HAProxy will have to learn for each new session.
872
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100873 <length> this is the max number of characters that will be memorized and
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100874 checked in each cookie value.
875
876 <holdtime> this is the time after which the cookie will be removed from
877 memory if unused. If no unit is specified, this time is in
878 milliseconds.
879
Cyril Bontébf47aeb2009-10-15 00:15:40 +0200880 request-learn
881 If this option is specified, then haproxy will be able to learn
882 the cookie found in the request in case the server does not
883 specify any in response. This is typically what happens with
884 PHPSESSID cookies, or when haproxy's session expires before
885 the application's session and the correct server is selected.
886 It is recommended to specify this option to improve reliability.
887
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100888 prefix When this option is specified, haproxy will match on the cookie
889 prefix (or URL parameter prefix). The appsession value is the
890 data following this prefix.
891
892 Example :
893 appsession ASPSESSIONID len 64 timeout 3h prefix
894
895 This will match the cookie ASPSESSIONIDXXXX=XXXXX,
896 the appsession value will be XXXX=XXXXX.
897
898 mode This option allows to change the URL parser mode.
899 2 modes are currently supported :
900 - path-parameters :
901 The parser looks for the appsession in the path parameters
902 part (each parameter is separated by a semi-colon), which is
903 convenient for JSESSIONID for example.
904 This is the default mode if the option is not set.
905 - query-string :
906 In this mode, the parser will look for the appsession in the
907 query string.
908
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100909 When an application cookie is defined in a backend, HAProxy will check when
910 the server sets such a cookie, and will store its value in a table, and
911 associate it with the server's identifier. Up to <length> characters from
912 the value will be retained. On each connection, haproxy will look for this
Cyril Bontéb21570a2009-11-29 20:04:48 +0100913 cookie both in the "Cookie:" headers, and as a URL parameter (depending on
914 the mode used). If a known value is found, the client will be directed to the
915 server associated with this value. Otherwise, the load balancing algorithm is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100916 applied. Cookies are automatically removed from memory when they have been
917 unused for a duration longer than <holdtime>.
918
919 The definition of an application cookie is limited to one per backend.
920
921 Example :
922 appsession JSESSIONID len 52 timeout 3h
923
924 See also : "cookie", "capture cookie" and "balance".
925
926
Willy Tarreauc73ce2b2008-01-06 10:55:10 +0100927backlog <conns>
928 Give hints to the system about the approximate listen backlog desired size
929 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
930 yes | yes | yes | no
931 Arguments :
932 <conns> is the number of pending connections. Depending on the operating
933 system, it may represent the number of already acknowledged
934 connections, of non-acknowledged ones, or both.
935
936 In order to protect against SYN flood attacks, one solution is to increase
937 the system's SYN backlog size. Depending on the system, sometimes it is just
938 tunable via a system parameter, sometimes it is not adjustable at all, and
939 sometimes the system relies on hints given by the application at the time of
940 the listen() syscall. By default, HAProxy passes the frontend's maxconn value
941 to the listen() syscall. On systems which can make use of this value, it can
942 sometimes be useful to be able to specify a different value, hence this
943 backlog parameter.
944
945 On Linux 2.4, the parameter is ignored by the system. On Linux 2.6, it is
946 used as a hint and the system accepts up to the smallest greater power of
947 two, and never more than some limits (usually 32768).
948
949 See also : "maxconn" and the target operating system's tuning guide.
950
951
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100952balance <algorithm> [ <arguments> ]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +0200953balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100954 Define the load balancing algorithm to be used in a backend.
955 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
956 yes | no | yes | yes
957 Arguments :
958 <algorithm> is the algorithm used to select a server when doing load
959 balancing. This only applies when no persistence information
960 is available, or when a connection is redispatched to another
961 server. <algorithm> may be one of the following :
962
963 roundrobin Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
964 This is the smoothest and fairest algorithm when the server's
965 processing time remains equally distributed. This algorithm
966 is dynamic, which means that server weights may be adjusted
Willy Tarreau9757a382009-10-03 12:56:50 +0200967 on the fly for slow starts for instance. It is limited by
968 design to 4128 active servers per backend. Note that in some
969 large farms, when a server becomes up after having been down
970 for a very short time, it may sometimes take a few hundreds
971 requests for it to be re-integrated into the farm and start
972 receiving traffic. This is normal, though very rare. It is
973 indicated here in case you would have the chance to observe
974 it, so that you don't worry.
975
976 static-rr Each server is used in turns, according to their weights.
977 This algorithm is as similar to roundrobin except that it is
978 static, which means that changing a server's weight on the
979 fly will have no effect. On the other hand, it has no design
980 limitation on the number of servers, and when a server goes
981 up, it is always immediately reintroduced into the farm, once
982 the full map is recomputed. It also uses slightly less CPU to
983 run (around -1%).
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100984
Willy Tarreau2d2a7f82008-03-17 12:07:56 +0100985 leastconn The server with the lowest number of connections receives the
986 connection. Round-robin is performed within groups of servers
987 of the same load to ensure that all servers will be used. Use
988 of this algorithm is recommended where very long sessions are
989 expected, such as LDAP, SQL, TSE, etc... but is not very well
990 suited for protocols using short sessions such as HTTP. This
991 algorithm is dynamic, which means that server weights may be
992 adjusted on the fly for slow starts for instance.
993
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +0100994 source The source IP address is hashed and divided by the total
995 weight of the running servers to designate which server will
996 receive the request. This ensures that the same client IP
997 address will always reach the same server as long as no
998 server goes down or up. If the hash result changes due to the
999 number of running servers changing, many clients will be
1000 directed to a different server. This algorithm is generally
1001 used in TCP mode where no cookie may be inserted. It may also
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001002 be used on the Internet to provide a best-effort stickiness
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001003 to clients which refuse session cookies. This algorithm is
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001004 static by default, which means that changing a server's
1005 weight on the fly will have no effect, but this can be
1006 changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001007
1008 uri The left part of the URI (before the question mark) is hashed
1009 and divided by the total weight of the running servers. The
1010 result designates which server will receive the request. This
1011 ensures that a same URI will always be directed to the same
1012 server as long as no server goes up or down. This is used
1013 with proxy caches and anti-virus proxies in order to maximize
1014 the cache hit rate. Note that this algorithm may only be used
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001015 in an HTTP backend. This algorithm is static by default,
1016 which means that changing a server's weight on the fly will
1017 have no effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001018
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001019 This algorithm support two optional parameters "len" and
1020 "depth", both followed by a positive integer number. These
1021 options may be helpful when it is needed to balance servers
1022 based on the beginning of the URI only. The "len" parameter
1023 indicates that the algorithm should only consider that many
1024 characters at the beginning of the URI to compute the hash.
1025 Note that having "len" set to 1 rarely makes sense since most
1026 URIs start with a leading "/".
1027
1028 The "depth" parameter indicates the maximum directory depth
1029 to be used to compute the hash. One level is counted for each
1030 slash in the request. If both parameters are specified, the
1031 evaluation stops when either is reached.
1032
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001033 url_param The URL parameter specified in argument will be looked up in
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001034 the query string of each HTTP GET request.
1035
1036 If the modifier "check_post" is used, then an HTTP POST
1037 request entity will be searched for the parameter argument,
1038 when the question mark indicating a query string ('?') is not
1039 present in the URL. Optionally, specify a number of octets to
1040 wait for before attempting to search the message body. If the
1041 entity can not be searched, then round robin is used for each
1042 request. For instance, if your clients always send the LB
1043 parameter in the first 128 bytes, then specify that. The
1044 default is 48. The entity data will not be scanned until the
1045 required number of octets have arrived at the gateway, this
1046 is the minimum of: (default/max_wait, Content-Length or first
1047 chunk length). If Content-Length is missing or zero, it does
1048 not need to wait for more data than the client promised to
1049 send. When Content-Length is present and larger than
1050 <max_wait>, then waiting is limited to <max_wait> and it is
1051 assumed that this will be enough data to search for the
1052 presence of the parameter. In the unlikely event that
1053 Transfer-Encoding: chunked is used, only the first chunk is
1054 scanned. Parameter values separated by a chunk boundary, may
1055 be randomly balanced if at all.
1056
1057 If the parameter is found followed by an equal sign ('=') and
1058 a value, then the value is hashed and divided by the total
1059 weight of the running servers. The result designates which
1060 server will receive the request.
1061
1062 This is used to track user identifiers in requests and ensure
1063 that a same user ID will always be sent to the same server as
1064 long as no server goes up or down. If no value is found or if
1065 the parameter is not found, then a round robin algorithm is
1066 applied. Note that this algorithm may only be used in an HTTP
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001067 backend. This algorithm is static by default, which means
1068 that changing a server's weight on the fly will have no
1069 effect, but this can be changed using "hash-type".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001070
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001071 hdr(name) The HTTP header <name> will be looked up in each HTTP request.
1072 Just as with the equivalent ACL 'hdr()' function, the header
1073 name in parenthesis is not case sensitive. If the header is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001074 absent or if it does not contain any value, the roundrobin
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001075 algorithm is applied instead.
1076
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001077 An optional 'use_domain_only' parameter is available, for
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001078 reducing the hash algorithm to the main domain part with some
1079 specific headers such as 'Host'. For instance, in the Host
1080 value "haproxy.1wt.eu", only "1wt" will be considered.
1081
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001082 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1083 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1084 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1085
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001086 rdp-cookie
1087 rdp-cookie(name)
1088 The RDP cookie <name> (or "mstshash" if omitted) will be
1089 looked up and hashed for each incoming TCP request. Just as
1090 with the equivalent ACL 'req_rdp_cookie()' function, the name
1091 is not case-sensitive. This mechanism is useful as a degraded
1092 persistence mode, as it makes it possible to always send the
1093 same user (or the same session ID) to the same server. If the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001094 cookie is not found, the normal roundrobin algorithm is
Emeric Brun736aa232009-06-30 17:56:00 +02001095 used instead.
1096
1097 Note that for this to work, the frontend must ensure that an
1098 RDP cookie is already present in the request buffer. For this
1099 you must use 'tcp-request content accept' rule combined with
1100 a 'req_rdp_cookie_cnt' ACL.
1101
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001102 This algorithm is static by default, which means that
1103 changing a server's weight on the fly will have no effect,
1104 but this can be changed using "hash-type".
1105
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001106 <arguments> is an optional list of arguments which may be needed by some
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001107 algorithms. Right now, only "url_param" and "uri" support an
1108 optional argument.
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001109
Marek Majkowski9c30fc12008-04-27 23:25:55 +02001110 balance uri [len <len>] [depth <depth>]
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001111 balance url_param <param> [check_post [<max_wait>]]
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001112
Willy Tarreau3cd9af22009-03-15 14:06:41 +01001113 The load balancing algorithm of a backend is set to roundrobin when no other
1114 algorithm, mode nor option have been set. The algorithm may only be set once
1115 for each backend.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001116
1117 Examples :
1118 balance roundrobin
1119 balance url_param userid
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001120 balance url_param session_id check_post 64
Benoitaffb4812009-03-25 13:02:10 +01001121 balance hdr(User-Agent)
1122 balance hdr(host)
1123 balance hdr(Host) use_domain_only
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001124
1125 Note: the following caveats and limitations on using the "check_post"
1126 extension with "url_param" must be considered :
1127
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001128 - all POST requests are eligible for consideration, because there is no way
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001129 to determine if the parameters will be found in the body or entity which
1130 may contain binary data. Therefore another method may be required to
1131 restrict consideration of POST requests that have no URL parameters in
1132 the body. (see acl reqideny http_end)
1133
1134 - using a <max_wait> value larger than the request buffer size does not
1135 make sense and is useless. The buffer size is set at build time, and
1136 defaults to 16 kB.
1137
1138 - Content-Encoding is not supported, the parameter search will probably
1139 fail; and load balancing will fall back to Round Robin.
1140
1141 - Expect: 100-continue is not supported, load balancing will fall back to
1142 Round Robin.
1143
1144 - Transfer-Encoding (RFC2616 3.6.1) is only supported in the first chunk.
1145 If the entire parameter value is not present in the first chunk, the
1146 selection of server is undefined (actually, defined by how little
1147 actually appeared in the first chunk).
1148
1149 - This feature does not support generation of a 100, 411 or 501 response.
1150
1151 - In some cases, requesting "check_post" MAY attempt to scan the entire
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001152 contents of a message body. Scanning normally terminates when linear
matt.farnsworth@nokia.com1c2ab962008-04-14 20:47:37 +02001153 white space or control characters are found, indicating the end of what
1154 might be a URL parameter list. This is probably not a concern with SGML
1155 type message bodies.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001156
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001157 See also : "dispatch", "cookie", "appsession", "transparent", "hash-type" and
1158 "http_proxy".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001159
1160
1161bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...]
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001162bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] interface <interface>
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001163bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] mss <maxseg>
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001164bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] transparent
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001165bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] id <id>
1166bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] name <name>
Willy Tarreau53319c92009-11-28 08:21:29 +01001167bind [<address>]:<port> [, ...] defer-accept
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001168 Define one or several listening addresses and/or ports in a frontend.
1169 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1170 no | yes | yes | no
1171 Arguments :
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001172 <address> is optional and can be a host name, an IPv4 address, an IPv6
1173 address, or '*'. It designates the address the frontend will
1174 listen on. If unset, all IPv4 addresses of the system will be
1175 listened on. The same will apply for '*' or the system's
1176 special address "0.0.0.0".
1177
1178 <port> is the TCP port number the proxy will listen on. The port is
1179 mandatory. Note that in the case of an IPv6 address, the port
1180 is always the number after the last colon (':').
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001181
Willy Tarreau5e6e2042009-02-04 17:19:29 +01001182 <interface> is an optional physical interface name. This is currently
1183 only supported on Linux. The interface must be a physical
1184 interface, not an aliased interface. When specified, all
1185 addresses on the same line will only be accepted if the
1186 incoming packet physically come through the designated
1187 interface. It is also possible to bind multiple frontends to
1188 the same address if they are bound to different interfaces.
1189 Note that binding to a physical interface requires root
1190 privileges.
1191
Willy Tarreaube1b9182009-06-14 18:48:19 +02001192 <maxseg> is an optional TCP Maximum Segment Size (MSS) value to be
1193 advertised on incoming connections. This can be used to force
1194 a lower MSS for certain specific ports, for instance for
1195 connections passing through a VPN. Note that this relies on a
1196 kernel feature which is theorically supported under Linux but
1197 was buggy in all versions prior to 2.6.28. It may or may not
1198 work on other operating systems. The commonly advertised
1199 value on Ethernet networks is 1460 = 1500(MTU) - 40(IP+TCP).
1200
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001201 <id> is a persistent value for socket ID. Must be positive and
1202 unique in the proxy. An unused value will automatically be
1203 assigned if unset. Can only be used when defining only a
1204 single socket.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02001205
1206 <name> is an optional name provided for stats
1207
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001208 transparent is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1209 Linux kernels. It indicates that the addresses will be bound
1210 even if they do not belong to the local machine. Any packet
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001211 targeting any of these addresses will be caught just as if
Willy Tarreaub1e52e82008-01-13 14:49:51 +01001212 the address was locally configured. This normally requires
1213 that IP forwarding is enabled. Caution! do not use this with
1214 the default address '*', as it would redirect any traffic for
1215 the specified port. This keyword is available only when
1216 HAProxy is built with USE_LINUX_TPROXY=1.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001217
Willy Tarreaucb6cd432009-10-13 07:34:14 +02001218 defer_accept is an optional keyword which is supported only on certain
1219 Linux kernels. It states that a connection will only be
1220 accepted once some data arrive on it, or at worst after the
1221 first retransmit. This should be used only on protocols for
1222 which the client talks first (eg: HTTP). It can slightly
1223 improve performance by ensuring that most of the request is
1224 already available when the connection is accepted. On the
1225 other hand, it will not be able to detect connections which
1226 don't talk. It is important to note that this option is
1227 broken in all kernels up to 2.6.31, as the connection is
1228 never accepted until the client talks. This can cause issues
1229 with front firewalls which would see an established
1230 connection while the proxy will only see it in SYN_RECV.
1231
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001232 It is possible to specify a list of address:port combinations delimited by
1233 commas. The frontend will then listen on all of these addresses. There is no
1234 fixed limit to the number of addresses and ports which can be listened on in
1235 a frontend, as well as there is no limit to the number of "bind" statements
1236 in a frontend.
1237
1238 Example :
1239 listen http_proxy
1240 bind :80,:443
1241 bind 10.0.0.1:10080,10.0.0.1:10443
1242
1243 See also : "source".
1244
1245
Willy Tarreau0b9c02c2009-02-04 22:05:05 +01001246bind-process [ all | odd | even | <number 1-32> ] ...
1247 Limit visibility of an instance to a certain set of processes numbers.
1248 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1249 yes | yes | yes | yes
1250 Arguments :
1251 all All process will see this instance. This is the default. It
1252 may be used to override a default value.
1253
1254 odd This instance will be enabled on processes 1,3,5,...31. This
1255 option may be combined with other numbers.
1256
1257 even This instance will be enabled on processes 2,4,6,...32. This
1258 option may be combined with other numbers. Do not use it
1259 with less than 2 processes otherwise some instances might be
1260 missing from all processes.
1261
1262 number The instance will be enabled on this process number, between
1263 1 and 32. You must be careful not to reference a process
1264 number greater than the configured global.nbproc, otherwise
1265 some instances might be missing from all processes.
1266
1267 This keyword limits binding of certain instances to certain processes. This
1268 is useful in order not to have too many processes listening to the same
1269 ports. For instance, on a dual-core machine, it might make sense to set
1270 'nbproc 2' in the global section, then distributes the listeners among 'odd'
1271 and 'even' instances.
1272
1273 At the moment, it is not possible to reference more than 32 processes using
1274 this keyword, but this should be more than enough for most setups. Please
1275 note that 'all' really means all processes and is not limited to the first
1276 32.
1277
1278 If some backends are referenced by frontends bound to other processes, the
1279 backend automatically inherits the frontend's processes.
1280
1281 Example :
1282 listen app_ip1
1283 bind 10.0.0.1:80
1284 bind_process odd
1285
1286 listen app_ip2
1287 bind 10.0.0.2:80
1288 bind_process even
1289
1290 listen management
1291 bind 10.0.0.3:80
1292 bind_process 1 2 3 4
1293
1294 See also : "nbproc" in global section.
1295
1296
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001297block { if | unless } <condition>
1298 Block a layer 7 request if/unless a condition is matched
1299 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1300 no | yes | yes | yes
1301
1302 The HTTP request will be blocked very early in the layer 7 processing
1303 if/unless <condition> is matched. A 403 error will be returned if the request
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001304 is blocked. The condition has to reference ACLs (see section 7). This is
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001305 typically used to deny access to certain sensible resources if some
1306 conditions are met or not met. There is no fixed limit to the number of
1307 "block" statements per instance.
1308
1309 Example:
1310 acl invalid_src src 0.0.0.0/7 224.0.0.0/3
1311 acl invalid_src src_port 0:1023
1312 acl local_dst hdr(host) -i localhost
1313 block if invalid_src || local_dst
1314
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001315 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001316
1317
1318capture cookie <name> len <length>
1319 Capture and log a cookie in the request and in the response.
1320 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1321 no | yes | yes | no
1322 Arguments :
1323 <name> is the beginning of the name of the cookie to capture. In order
1324 to match the exact name, simply suffix the name with an equal
1325 sign ('='). The full name will appear in the logs, which is
1326 useful with application servers which adjust both the cookie name
1327 and value (eg: ASPSESSIONXXXXX).
1328
1329 <length> is the maximum number of characters to report in the logs, which
1330 include the cookie name, the equal sign and the value, all in the
1331 standard "name=value" form. The string will be truncated on the
1332 right if it exceeds <length>.
1333
1334 Only the first cookie is captured. Both the "cookie" request headers and the
1335 "set-cookie" response headers are monitored. This is particularly useful to
1336 check for application bugs causing session crossing or stealing between
1337 users, because generally the user's cookies can only change on a login page.
1338
1339 When the cookie was not presented by the client, the associated log column
1340 will report "-". When a request does not cause a cookie to be assigned by the
1341 server, a "-" is reported in the response column.
1342
1343 The capture is performed in the frontend only because it is necessary that
1344 the log format does not change for a given frontend depending on the
1345 backends. This may change in the future. Note that there can be only one
1346 "capture cookie" statement in a frontend. The maximum capture length is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001347 configured in the sources by default to 64 characters. It is not possible to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001348 specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1349
1350 Example:
1351 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
1352
1353 See also : "capture request header", "capture response header" as well as
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001354 section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001355
1356
1357capture request header <name> len <length>
1358 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified request header.
1359 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1360 no | yes | yes | no
1361 Arguments :
1362 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001363 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001364 appear in the requests, with the first letter of each word in
1365 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1366 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1367
1368 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1369 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1370 it exceeds <length>.
1371
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001372 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001373 value will be added to the logs between braces ('{}'). If multiple headers
1374 are captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar ('|') and will appear
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001375 in the same order they were declared in the configuration. Non-existent
1376 headers will be logged just as an empty string. Common uses for request
1377 header captures include the "Host" field in virtual hosting environments, the
1378 "Content-length" when uploads are supported, "User-agent" to quickly
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001379 differentiate between real users and robots, and "X-Forwarded-For" in proxied
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001380 environments to find where the request came from.
1381
1382 Note that when capturing headers such as "User-agent", some spaces may be
1383 logged, making the log analysis more difficult. Thus be careful about what
1384 you log if you know your log parser is not smart enough to rely on the
1385 braces.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001386
1387 There is no limit to the number of captured request headers, but each capture
1388 is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent for a
1389 same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It is not
1390 possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1391
1392 Example:
1393 capture request header Host len 15
1394 capture request header X-Forwarded-For len 15
1395 capture request header Referrer len 15
1396
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001397 See also : "capture cookie", "capture response header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001398 about logging.
1399
1400
1401capture response header <name> len <length>
1402 Capture and log the first occurrence of the specified response header.
1403 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1404 no | yes | yes | no
1405 Arguments :
1406 <name> is the name of the header to capture. The header names are not
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001407 case-sensitive, but it is a common practice to write them as they
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001408 appear in the response, with the first letter of each word in
1409 upper case. The header name will not appear in the logs, only the
1410 value is reported, but the position in the logs is respected.
1411
1412 <length> is the maximum number of characters to extract from the value and
1413 report in the logs. The string will be truncated on the right if
1414 it exceeds <length>.
1415
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001416 Only the first value of the last occurrence of the header is captured. The
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001417 result will be added to the logs between braces ('{}') after the captured
1418 request headers. If multiple headers are captured, they will be delimited by
1419 a vertical bar ('|') and will appear in the same order they were declared in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001420 the configuration. Non-existent headers will be logged just as an empty
1421 string. Common uses for response header captures include the "Content-length"
1422 header which indicates how many bytes are expected to be returned, the
1423 "Location" header to track redirections.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001424
1425 There is no limit to the number of captured response headers, but each
1426 capture is limited to 64 characters. In order to keep log format consistent
1427 for a same frontend, header captures can only be declared in a frontend. It
1428 is not possible to specify a capture in a "defaults" section.
1429
1430 Example:
1431 capture response header Content-length len 9
1432 capture response header Location len 15
1433
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02001434 See also : "capture cookie", "capture request header" as well as section 8
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001435 about logging.
1436
1437
1438clitimeout <timeout>
1439 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
1440 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1441 yes | yes | yes | no
1442 Arguments :
1443 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1444 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1445 as explained at the top of this document.
1446
1447 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
1448 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
1449 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
1450 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
1451 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
1452 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
1453 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
1454 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001455 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001456 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
1457 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
1458
1459 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
1460 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1461 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1462 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1463 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
1464 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1465
1466 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
1467 Please use "timeout client" instead.
1468
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01001469 See also : "timeout client", "timeout http-request", "timeout server", and
1470 "srvtimeout".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001471
1472
1473contimeout <timeout>
1474 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
1475 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1476 yes | no | yes | yes
1477 Arguments :
1478 <timeout> is the timeout value is specified in milliseconds by default, but
1479 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
1480 as explained at the top of this document.
1481
1482 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001483 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001484 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
1485 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
1486 connect timeout also presets the queue timeout to the same value if this one
1487 has not been specified. Historically, the contimeout was also used to set the
1488 tarpit timeout in a listen section, which is not possible in a pure frontend.
1489
1490 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
1491 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
1492 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
1493 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
1494 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
1495 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
1496
1497 This parameter is provided for backwards compatibility but is currently
1498 deprecated. Please use "timeout connect", "timeout queue" or "timeout tarpit"
1499 instead.
1500
1501 See also : "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout tarpit",
1502 "timeout server", "contimeout".
1503
1504
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02001505cookie <name> [ rewrite | insert | prefix ] [ indirect ] [ nocache ]
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001506 [ postonly ] [ domain <domain> ]*
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001507 Enable cookie-based persistence in a backend.
1508 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1509 yes | no | yes | yes
1510 Arguments :
1511 <name> is the name of the cookie which will be monitored, modified or
1512 inserted in order to bring persistence. This cookie is sent to
1513 the client via a "Set-Cookie" header in the response, and is
1514 brought back by the client in a "Cookie" header in all requests.
1515 Special care should be taken to choose a name which does not
1516 conflict with any likely application cookie. Also, if the same
1517 backends are subject to be used by the same clients (eg:
1518 HTTP/HTTPS), care should be taken to use different cookie names
1519 between all backends if persistence between them is not desired.
1520
1521 rewrite This keyword indicates that the cookie will be provided by the
1522 server and that haproxy will have to modify its value to set the
1523 server's identifier in it. This mode is handy when the management
1524 of complex combinations of "Set-cookie" and "Cache-control"
1525 headers is left to the application. The application can then
1526 decide whether or not it is appropriate to emit a persistence
1527 cookie. Since all responses should be monitored, this mode only
1528 works in HTTP close mode. Unless the application behaviour is
1529 very complex and/or broken, it is advised not to start with this
1530 mode for new deployments. This keyword is incompatible with
1531 "insert" and "prefix".
1532
1533 insert This keyword indicates that the persistence cookie will have to
1534 be inserted by haproxy in the responses. If the server emits a
1535 cookie with the same name, it will be replaced anyway. For this
1536 reason, this mode can be used to upgrade existing configurations
1537 running in the "rewrite" mode. The cookie will only be a session
1538 cookie and will not be stored on the client's disk. Due to
1539 caching effects, it is generally wise to add the "indirect" and
1540 "nocache" or "postonly" keywords (see below). The "insert"
1541 keyword is not compatible with "rewrite" and "prefix".
1542
1543 prefix This keyword indicates that instead of relying on a dedicated
1544 cookie for the persistence, an existing one will be completed.
1545 This may be needed in some specific environments where the client
1546 does not support more than one single cookie and the application
1547 already needs it. In this case, whenever the server sets a cookie
1548 named <name>, it will be prefixed with the server's identifier
1549 and a delimiter. The prefix will be removed from all client
1550 requests so that the server still finds the cookie it emitted.
1551 Since all requests and responses are subject to being modified,
1552 this mode requires the HTTP close mode. The "prefix" keyword is
1553 not compatible with "rewrite" and "insert".
1554
1555 indirect When this option is specified in insert mode, cookies will only
1556 be added when the server was not reached after a direct access,
1557 which means that only when a server is elected after applying a
1558 load-balancing algorithm, or after a redispatch, then the cookie
1559 will be inserted. If the client has all the required information
1560 to connect to the same server next time, no further cookie will
1561 be inserted. In all cases, when the "indirect" option is used in
1562 insert mode, the cookie is always removed from the requests
1563 transmitted to the server. The persistence mechanism then becomes
1564 totally transparent from the application point of view.
1565
1566 nocache This option is recommended in conjunction with the insert mode
1567 when there is a cache between the client and HAProxy, as it
1568 ensures that a cacheable response will be tagged non-cacheable if
1569 a cookie needs to be inserted. This is important because if all
1570 persistence cookies are added on a cacheable home page for
1571 instance, then all customers will then fetch the page from an
1572 outer cache and will all share the same persistence cookie,
1573 leading to one server receiving much more traffic than others.
1574 See also the "insert" and "postonly" options.
1575
1576 postonly This option ensures that cookie insertion will only be performed
1577 on responses to POST requests. It is an alternative to the
1578 "nocache" option, because POST responses are not cacheable, so
1579 this ensures that the persistence cookie will never get cached.
1580 Since most sites do not need any sort of persistence before the
1581 first POST which generally is a login request, this is a very
1582 efficient method to optimize caching without risking to find a
1583 persistence cookie in the cache.
1584 See also the "insert" and "nocache" options.
1585
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001586 domain This option allows to specify the domain at which a cookie is
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001587 inserted. It requires exactly one parameter: a valid domain
Willy Tarreau68a897b2009-12-03 23:28:34 +01001588 name. If the domain begins with a dot, the browser is allowed to
1589 use it for any host ending with that name. It is also possible to
1590 specify several domain names by invoking this option multiple
1591 times. Some browsers might have small limits on the number of
1592 domains, so be careful when doing that. For the record, sending
1593 10 domains to MSIE 6 or Firefox 2 works as expected.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiefe3b6f2008-05-23 23:49:32 +02001594
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001595 There can be only one persistence cookie per HTTP backend, and it can be
1596 declared in a defaults section. The value of the cookie will be the value
1597 indicated after the "cookie" keyword in a "server" statement. If no cookie
1598 is declared for a given server, the cookie is not set.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02001599
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001600 Examples :
1601 cookie JSESSIONID prefix
1602 cookie SRV insert indirect nocache
1603 cookie SRV insert postonly indirect
1604
1605 See also : "appsession", "balance source", "capture cookie", "server".
1606
1607
1608default_backend <backend>
1609 Specify the backend to use when no "use_backend" rule has been matched.
1610 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1611 yes | yes | yes | no
1612 Arguments :
1613 <backend> is the name of the backend to use.
1614
1615 When doing content-switching between frontend and backends using the
1616 "use_backend" keyword, it is often useful to indicate which backend will be
1617 used when no rule has matched. It generally is the dynamic backend which
1618 will catch all undetermined requests.
1619
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001620 Example :
1621
1622 use_backend dynamic if url_dyn
1623 use_backend static if url_css url_img extension_img
1624 default_backend dynamic
1625
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001626 See also : "use_backend", "reqsetbe", "reqisetbe"
1627
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001628
1629disabled
1630 Disable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1631 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1632 yes | yes | yes | yes
1633 Arguments : none
1634
1635 The "disabled" keyword is used to disable an instance, mainly in order to
1636 liberate a listening port or to temporarily disable a service. The instance
1637 will still be created and its configuration will be checked, but it will be
1638 created in the "stopped" state and will appear as such in the statistics. It
1639 will not receive any traffic nor will it send any health-checks or logs. It
1640 is possible to disable many instances at once by adding the "disabled"
1641 keyword in a "defaults" section.
1642
1643 See also : "enabled"
1644
1645
1646enabled
1647 Enable a proxy, frontend or backend.
1648 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1649 yes | yes | yes | yes
1650 Arguments : none
1651
1652 The "enabled" keyword is used to explicitly enable an instance, when the
1653 defaults has been set to "disabled". This is very rarely used.
1654
1655 See also : "disabled"
1656
1657
1658errorfile <code> <file>
1659 Return a file contents instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1660 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1661 yes | yes | yes | yes
1662 Arguments :
1663 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1664 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1665
1666 <file> designates a file containing the full HTTP response. It is
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001667 recommended to follow the common practice of appending ".http" to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001668 the filename so that people do not confuse the response with HTML
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001669 error pages, and to use absolute paths, since files are read
1670 before any chroot is performed.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001671
1672 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1673 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1674 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1675
1676 The files are returned verbatim on the TCP socket. This allows any trick such
1677 as redirections to another URL or site, as well as tricks to clean cookies,
1678 force enable or disable caching, etc... The package provides default error
1679 files returning the same contents as default errors.
1680
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001681 The files should not exceed the configured buffer size (BUFSIZE), which
1682 generally is 8 or 16 kB, otherwise they will be truncated. It is also wise
1683 not to put any reference to local contents (eg: images) in order to avoid
1684 loops between the client and HAProxy when all servers are down, causing an
1685 error to be returned instead of an image. For better HTTP compliance, it is
1686 recommended that all header lines end with CR-LF and not LF alone.
1687
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001688 The files are read at the same time as the configuration and kept in memory.
1689 For this reason, the errors continue to be returned even when the process is
1690 chrooted, and no file change is considered while the process is running. A
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01001691 simple method for developing those files consists in associating them to the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001692 403 status code and interrogating a blocked URL.
1693
1694 See also : "errorloc", "errorloc302", "errorloc303"
1695
Willy Tarreau59140a22009-02-22 12:02:30 +01001696 Example :
1697 errorfile 400 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/400badreq.http
1698 errorfile 403 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/403forbid.http
1699 errorfile 503 /etc/haproxy/errorfiles/503sorry.http
1700
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001701
1702errorloc <code> <url>
1703errorloc302 <code> <url>
1704 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1705 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1706 yes | yes | yes | yes
1707 Arguments :
1708 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1709 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1710
1711 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1712 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1713 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1714 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1715 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1716
1717 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1718 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1719 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1720
1721 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 302 status code, which tells the
1722 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP method. This can be
1723 quite problematic in case of non-GET methods such as POST, because the URL
1724 sent to the client might not be allowed for something other than GET. To
1725 workaround this problem, please use "errorloc303" which send the HTTP 303
1726 status code, indicating to the client that the URL must be fetched with a GET
1727 request.
1728
1729 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc303"
1730
1731
1732errorloc303 <code> <url>
1733 Return an HTTP redirection to a URL instead of errors generated by HAProxy
1734 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1735 yes | yes | yes | yes
1736 Arguments :
1737 <code> is the HTTP status code. Currently, HAProxy is capable of
1738 generating codes 400, 403, 408, 500, 502, 503, and 504.
1739
1740 <url> it is the exact contents of the "Location" header. It may contain
1741 either a relative URI to an error page hosted on the same site,
1742 or an absolute URI designating an error page on another site.
1743 Special care should be given to relative URIs to avoid redirect
1744 loops if the URI itself may generate the same error (eg: 500).
1745
1746 It is important to understand that this keyword is not meant to rewrite
1747 errors returned by the server, but errors detected and returned by HAProxy.
1748 This is why the list of supported errors is limited to a small set.
1749
1750 Note that both keyword return the HTTP 303 status code, which tells the
1751 client to fetch the designated URL using the same HTTP GET method. This
1752 solves the usual problems associated with "errorloc" and the 302 code. It is
1753 possible that some very old browsers designed before HTTP/1.1 do not support
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01001754 it, but no such problem has been reported till now.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001755
1756 See also : "errorfile", "errorloc", "errorloc302"
1757
1758
1759fullconn <conns>
1760 Specify at what backend load the servers will reach their maxconn
1761 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1762 yes | no | yes | yes
1763 Arguments :
1764 <conns> is the number of connections on the backend which will make the
1765 servers use the maximal number of connections.
1766
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001767 When a server has a "maxconn" parameter specified, it means that its number
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001768 of concurrent connections will never go higher. Additionally, if it has a
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01001769 "minconn" parameter, it indicates a dynamic limit following the backend's
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001770 load. The server will then always accept at least <minconn> connections,
1771 never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on the ramp between both
1772 values when the backend has less than <conns> concurrent connections. This
1773 makes it possible to limit the load on the servers during normal loads, but
1774 push it further for important loads without overloading the servers during
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001775 exceptional loads.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001776
1777 Example :
1778 # The servers will accept between 100 and 1000 concurrent connections each
1779 # and the maximum of 1000 will be reached when the backend reaches 10000
1780 # connections.
1781 backend dynamic
1782 fullconn 10000
1783 server srv1 dyn1:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1784 server srv2 dyn2:80 minconn 100 maxconn 1000
1785
1786 See also : "maxconn", "server"
1787
1788
1789grace <time>
1790 Maintain a proxy operational for some time after a soft stop
1791 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1792 no | yes | yes | yes
1793 Arguments :
1794 <time> is the time (by default in milliseconds) for which the instance
1795 will remain operational with the frontend sockets still listening
1796 when a soft-stop is received via the SIGUSR1 signal.
1797
1798 This may be used to ensure that the services disappear in a certain order.
1799 This was designed so that frontends which are dedicated to monitoring by an
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01001800 external equipment fail immediately while other ones remain up for the time
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001801 needed by the equipment to detect the failure.
1802
1803 Note that currently, there is very little benefit in using this parameter,
1804 and it may in fact complicate the soft-reconfiguration process more than
1805 simplify it.
1806
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001807
Willy Tarreau6b2e11b2009-10-01 07:52:15 +02001808hash-type <method>
1809 Specify a method to use for mapping hashes to servers
1810 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1811 yes | no | yes | yes
1812 Arguments :
1813 map-based the hash table is a static array containing all alive servers.
1814 The hashes will be very smooth, will consider weights, but will
1815 be static in that weight changes while a server is up will be
1816 ignored. This means that there will be no slow start. Also,
1817 since a server is selected by its position in the array, most
1818 mappings are changed when the server count changes. This means
1819 that when a server goes up or down, or when a server is added
1820 to a farm, most connections will be redistributed to different
1821 servers. This can be inconvenient with caches for instance.
1822
1823 consistent the hash table is a tree filled with many occurrences of each
1824 server. The hash key is looked up in the tree and the closest
1825 server is chosen. This hash is dynamic, it supports changing
1826 weights while the servers are up, so it is compatible with the
1827 slow start feature. It has the advantage that when a server
1828 goes up or down, only its associations are moved. When a server
1829 is added to the farm, only a few part of the mappings are
1830 redistributed, making it an ideal algorithm for caches.
1831 However, due to its principle, the algorithm will never be very
1832 smooth and it may sometimes be necessary to adjust a server's
1833 weight or its ID to get a more balanced distribution. In order
1834 to get the same distribution on multiple load balancers, it is
1835 important that all servers have the same IDs.
1836
1837 The default hash type is "map-based" and is recommended for most usages.
1838
1839 See also : "balance", "server"
1840
1841
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001842http-check disable-on-404
1843 Enable a maintenance mode upon HTTP/404 response to health-checks
1844 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001845 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001846 Arguments : none
1847
1848 When this option is set, a server which returns an HTTP code 404 will be
1849 excluded from further load-balancing, but will still receive persistent
1850 connections. This provides a very convenient method for Web administrators
1851 to perform a graceful shutdown of their servers. It is also important to note
1852 that a server which is detected as failed while it was in this mode will not
1853 generate an alert, just a notice. If the server responds 2xx or 3xx again, it
1854 will immediately be reinserted into the farm. The status on the stats page
1855 reports "NOLB" for a server in this mode. It is important to note that this
1856 option only works in conjunction with the "httpchk" option.
1857
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001858 See also : "option httpchk"
1859
1860
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01001861id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02001862 Set a persistent ID to a proxy.
1863 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1864 no | yes | yes | yes
1865 Arguments : none
1866
1867 Set a persistent ID for the proxy. This ID must be unique and positive.
1868 An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first assigned
1869 value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01001870
1871
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001872log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02001873log <address> <facility> [<level> [<minlevel>]]
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001874 Enable per-instance logging of events and traffic.
1875 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1876 yes | yes | yes | yes
1877 Arguments :
1878 global should be used when the instance's logging parameters are the
1879 same as the global ones. This is the most common usage. "global"
1880 replaces <address>, <facility> and <level> with those of the log
1881 entries found in the "global" section. Only one "log global"
1882 statement may be used per instance, and this form takes no other
1883 parameter.
1884
1885 <address> indicates where to send the logs. It takes the same format as
1886 for the "global" section's logs, and can be one of :
1887
1888 - An IPv4 address optionally followed by a colon (':') and a UDP
1889 port. If no port is specified, 514 is used by default (the
1890 standard syslog port).
1891
1892 - A filesystem path to a UNIX domain socket, keeping in mind
1893 considerations for chroot (be sure the path is accessible
1894 inside the chroot) and uid/gid (be sure the path is
1895 appropriately writeable).
1896
1897 <facility> must be one of the 24 standard syslog facilities :
1898
1899 kern user mail daemon auth syslog lpr news
1900 uucp cron auth2 ftp ntp audit alert cron2
1901 local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7
1902
1903 <level> is optional and can be specified to filter outgoing messages. By
1904 default, all messages are sent. If a level is specified, only
1905 messages with a severity at least as important as this level
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02001906 will be sent. An optional minimum level can be specified. If it
1907 is set, logs emitted with a more severe level than this one will
1908 be capped to this level. This is used to avoid sending "emerg"
1909 messages on all terminals on some default syslog configurations.
1910 Eight levels are known :
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001911
1912 emerg alert crit err warning notice info debug
1913
1914 Note that up to two "log" entries may be specified per instance. However, if
1915 "log global" is used and if the "global" section already contains 2 log
1916 entries, then additional log entries will be ignored.
1917
1918 Also, it is important to keep in mind that it is the frontend which decides
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01001919 what to log from a connection, and that in case of content switching, the log
1920 entries from the backend will be ignored. Connections are logged at level
1921 "info".
1922
1923 However, backend log declaration define how and where servers status changes
1924 will be logged. Level "notice" will be used to indicate a server going up,
1925 "warning" will be used for termination signals and definitive service
1926 termination, and "alert" will be used for when a server goes down.
1927
1928 Note : According to RFC3164, messages are truncated to 1024 bytes before
1929 being emitted.
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001930
1931 Example :
1932 log global
Willy Tarreauf7edefa2009-05-10 17:20:05 +02001933 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice # only send important events
1934 log 127.0.0.1:514 local0 notice notice # same but limit output level
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001935
1936
1937maxconn <conns>
1938 Fix the maximum number of concurrent connections on a frontend
1939 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1940 yes | yes | yes | no
1941 Arguments :
1942 <conns> is the maximum number of concurrent connections the frontend will
1943 accept to serve. Excess connections will be queued by the system
1944 in the socket's listen queue and will be served once a connection
1945 closes.
1946
1947 If the system supports it, it can be useful on big sites to raise this limit
1948 very high so that haproxy manages connection queues, instead of leaving the
1949 clients with unanswered connection attempts. This value should not exceed the
1950 global maxconn. Also, keep in mind that a connection contains two buffers
1951 of 8kB each, as well as some other data resulting in about 17 kB of RAM being
1952 consumed per established connection. That means that a medium system equipped
1953 with 1GB of RAM can withstand around 40000-50000 concurrent connections if
1954 properly tuned.
1955
1956 Also, when <conns> is set to large values, it is possible that the servers
1957 are not sized to accept such loads, and for this reason it is generally wise
1958 to assign them some reasonable connection limits.
1959
1960 See also : "server", global section's "maxconn", "fullconn"
1961
1962
1963mode { tcp|http|health }
1964 Set the running mode or protocol of the instance
1965 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
1966 yes | yes | yes | yes
1967 Arguments :
1968 tcp The instance will work in pure TCP mode. A full-duplex connection
1969 will be established between clients and servers, and no layer 7
1970 examination will be performed. This is the default mode. It
1971 should be used for SSL, SSH, SMTP, ...
1972
1973 http The instance will work in HTTP mode. The client request will be
1974 analyzed in depth before connecting to any server. Any request
1975 which is not RFC-compliant will be rejected. Layer 7 filtering,
1976 processing and switching will be possible. This is the mode which
1977 brings HAProxy most of its value.
1978
1979 health The instance will work in "health" mode. It will just reply "OK"
1980 to incoming connections and close the connection. Nothing will be
1981 logged. This mode is used to reply to external components health
1982 checks. This mode is deprecated and should not be used anymore as
1983 it is possible to do the same and even better by combining TCP or
1984 HTTP modes with the "monitor" keyword.
1985
1986 When doing content switching, it is mandatory that the frontend and the
1987 backend are in the same mode (generally HTTP), otherwise the configuration
1988 will be refused.
1989
1990 Example :
1991 defaults http_instances
1992 mode http
1993
1994 See also : "monitor", "monitor-net"
1995
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001996
1997monitor fail [if | unless] <condition>
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01001998 Add a condition to report a failure to a monitor HTTP request.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01001999 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2000 no | yes | yes | no
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002001 Arguments :
2002 if <cond> the monitor request will fail if the condition is satisfied,
2003 and will succeed otherwise. The condition should describe a
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002004 combined test which must induce a failure if all conditions
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002005 are met, for instance a low number of servers both in a
2006 backend and its backup.
2007
2008 unless <cond> the monitor request will succeed only if the condition is
2009 satisfied, and will fail otherwise. Such a condition may be
2010 based on a test on the presence of a minimum number of active
2011 servers in a list of backends.
2012
2013 This statement adds a condition which can force the response to a monitor
2014 request to report a failure. By default, when an external component queries
2015 the URI dedicated to monitoring, a 200 response is returned. When one of the
2016 conditions above is met, haproxy will return 503 instead of 200. This is
2017 very useful to report a site failure to an external component which may base
2018 routing advertisements between multiple sites on the availability reported by
2019 haproxy. In this case, one would rely on an ACL involving the "nbsrv"
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002020 criterion. Note that "monitor fail" only works in HTTP mode.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002021
2022 Example:
2023 frontend www
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002024 mode http
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002025 acl site_dead nbsrv(dynamic) lt 2
2026 acl site_dead nbsrv(static) lt 2
2027 monitor-uri /site_alive
2028 monitor fail if site_dead
2029
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002030 See also : "monitor-net", "monitor-uri"
2031
2032
2033monitor-net <source>
2034 Declare a source network which is limited to monitor requests
2035 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2036 yes | yes | yes | no
2037 Arguments :
2038 <source> is the source IPv4 address or network which will only be able to
2039 get monitor responses to any request. It can be either an IPv4
2040 address, a host name, or an address followed by a slash ('/')
2041 followed by a mask.
2042
2043 In TCP mode, any connection coming from a source matching <source> will cause
2044 the connection to be immediately closed without any log. This allows another
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002045 equipment to probe the port and verify that it is still listening, without
Willy Tarreau2769aa02007-12-27 18:26:09 +01002046 forwarding the connection to a remote server.
2047
2048 In HTTP mode, a connection coming from a source matching <source> will be
2049 accepted, the following response will be sent without waiting for a request,
2050 then the connection will be closed : "HTTP/1.0 200 OK". This is normally
2051 enough for any front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and
2052 running without forwarding the request to a backend server.
2053
2054 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2055 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2056 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2057 nothing more. Right now, it is not possible to set failure conditions on
2058 requests caught by "monitor-net".
2059
2060 Example :
2061 # addresses .252 and .253 are just probing us.
2062 frontend www
2063 monitor-net 192.168.0.252/31
2064
2065 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-uri"
2066
2067
2068monitor-uri <uri>
2069 Intercept a URI used by external components' monitor requests
2070 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2071 yes | yes | yes | no
2072 Arguments :
2073 <uri> is the exact URI which we want to intercept to return HAProxy's
2074 health status instead of forwarding the request.
2075
2076 When an HTTP request referencing <uri> will be received on a frontend,
2077 HAProxy will not forward it nor log it, but instead will return either
2078 "HTTP/1.0 200 OK" or "HTTP/1.0 503 Service unavailable", depending on failure
2079 conditions defined with "monitor fail". This is normally enough for any
2080 front-end HTTP probe to detect that the service is UP and running without
2081 forwarding the request to a backend server. Note that the HTTP method, the
2082 version and all headers are ignored, but the request must at least be valid
2083 at the HTTP level. This keyword may only be used with an HTTP-mode frontend.
2084
2085 Monitor requests are processed very early. It is not possible to block nor
2086 divert them using ACLs. They cannot be logged either, and it is the intended
2087 purpose. They are only used to report HAProxy's health to an upper component,
2088 nothing more. However, it is possible to add any number of conditions using
2089 "monitor fail" and ACLs so that the result can be adjusted to whatever check
2090 can be imagined (most often the number of available servers in a backend).
2091
2092 Example :
2093 # Use /haproxy_test to report haproxy's status
2094 frontend www
2095 mode http
2096 monitor-uri /haproxy_test
2097
2098 See also : "monitor fail", "monitor-net"
2099
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002100
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002101option abortonclose
2102no option abortonclose
2103 Enable or disable early dropping of aborted requests pending in queues.
2104 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2105 yes | no | yes | yes
2106 Arguments : none
2107
2108 In presence of very high loads, the servers will take some time to respond.
2109 The per-instance connection queue will inflate, and the response time will
2110 increase respective to the size of the queue times the average per-session
2111 response time. When clients will wait for more than a few seconds, they will
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002112 often hit the "STOP" button on their browser, leaving a useless request in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002113 the queue, and slowing down other users, and the servers as well, because the
2114 request will eventually be served, then aborted at the first error
2115 encountered while delivering the response.
2116
2117 As there is no way to distinguish between a full STOP and a simple output
2118 close on the client side, HTTP agents should be conservative and consider
2119 that the client might only have closed its output channel while waiting for
2120 the response. However, this introduces risks of congestion when lots of users
2121 do the same, and is completely useless nowadays because probably no client at
2122 all will close the session while waiting for the response. Some HTTP agents
2123 support this behaviour (Squid, Apache, HAProxy), and others do not (TUX, most
2124 hardware-based load balancers). So the probability for a closed input channel
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002125 to represent a user hitting the "STOP" button is close to 100%, and the risk
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002126 of being the single component to break rare but valid traffic is extremely
2127 low, which adds to the temptation to be able to abort a session early while
2128 still not served and not pollute the servers.
2129
2130 In HAProxy, the user can choose the desired behaviour using the option
2131 "abortonclose". By default (without the option) the behaviour is HTTP
2132 compliant and aborted requests will be served. But when the option is
2133 specified, a session with an incoming channel closed will be aborted while
2134 it is still possible, either pending in the queue for a connection slot, or
2135 during the connection establishment if the server has not yet acknowledged
2136 the connection request. This considerably reduces the queue size and the load
2137 on saturated servers when users are tempted to click on STOP, which in turn
2138 reduces the response time for other users.
2139
2140 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2141 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2142
2143 See also : "timeout queue" and server's "maxconn" and "maxqueue" parameters
2144
2145
Willy Tarreau4076a152009-04-02 15:18:36 +02002146option accept-invalid-http-request
2147no option accept-invalid-http-request
2148 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP request parsing
2149 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2150 yes | yes | yes | no
2151 Arguments : none
2152
2153 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2154 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2155 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2156 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2157 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2158 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2159 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2160 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2161 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2162
2163 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2164 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2165 been confirmed.
2166
2167 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2168 requests, but the complete request will be captured in order to permit later
2169 analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket. Doing this
2170 also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2171
2172 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2173 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2174
2175 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-response" and "show errors" on the
2176 stats socket.
2177
2178
2179option accept-invalid-http-response
2180no option accept-invalid-http-response
2181 Enable or disable relaxing of HTTP response parsing
2182 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2183 yes | no | yes | yes
2184 Arguments : none
2185
2186 By default, HAProxy complies with RFC2616 in terms of message parsing. This
2187 means that invalid characters in header names are not permitted and cause an
2188 error to be returned to the client. This is the desired behaviour as such
2189 forbidden characters are essentially used to build attacks exploiting server
2190 weaknesses, and bypass security filtering. Sometimes, a buggy browser or
2191 server will emit invalid header names for whatever reason (configuration,
2192 implementation) and the issue will not be immediately fixed. In such a case,
2193 it is possible to relax HAProxy's header name parser to accept any character
2194 even if that does not make sense, by specifying this option.
2195
2196 This option should never be enabled by default as it hides application bugs
2197 and open security breaches. It should only be deployed after a problem has
2198 been confirmed.
2199
2200 When this option is enabled, erroneous header names will still be accepted in
2201 responses, but the complete response will be captured in order to permit
2202 later analysis using the "show errors" request on the UNIX stats socket.
2203 Doing this also helps confirming that the issue has been solved.
2204
2205 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2206 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2207
2208 See also : "option accept-invalid-http-request" and "show errors" on the
2209 stats socket.
2210
2211
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002212option allbackups
2213no option allbackups
2214 Use either all backup servers at a time or only the first one
2215 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2216 yes | no | yes | yes
2217 Arguments : none
2218
2219 By default, the first operational backup server gets all traffic when normal
2220 servers are all down. Sometimes, it may be preferred to use multiple backups
2221 at once, because one will not be enough. When "option allbackups" is enabled,
2222 the load balancing will be performed among all backup servers when all normal
2223 ones are unavailable. The same load balancing algorithm will be used and the
2224 servers' weights will be respected. Thus, there will not be any priority
2225 order between the backup servers anymore.
2226
2227 This option is mostly used with static server farms dedicated to return a
2228 "sorry" page when an application is completely offline.
2229
2230 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2231 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2232
2233
2234option checkcache
2235no option checkcache
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002236 Analyze all server responses and block requests with cacheable cookies
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002237 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2238 yes | no | yes | yes
2239 Arguments : none
2240
2241 Some high-level frameworks set application cookies everywhere and do not
2242 always let enough control to the developer to manage how the responses should
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002243 be cached. When a session cookie is returned on a cacheable object, there is a
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002244 high risk of session crossing or stealing between users traversing the same
2245 caches. In some situations, it is better to block the response than to let
2246 some sensible session information go in the wild.
2247
2248 The option "checkcache" enables deep inspection of all server responses for
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002249 strict compliance with HTTP specification in terms of cacheability. It
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002250 carefully checks "Cache-control", "Pragma" and "Set-cookie" headers in server
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002251 response to check if there's a risk of caching a cookie on a client-side
2252 proxy. When this option is enabled, the only responses which can be delivered
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002253 to the client are :
2254 - all those without "Set-Cookie" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002255 - all those with a return code other than 200, 203, 206, 300, 301, 410,
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002256 provided that the server has not set a "Cache-control: public" header ;
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002257 - all those that come from a POST request, provided that the server has not
2258 set a 'Cache-Control: public' header ;
2259 - those with a 'Pragma: no-cache' header
2260 - those with a 'Cache-control: private' header
2261 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-store' header
2262 - those with a 'Cache-control: max-age=0' header
2263 - those with a 'Cache-control: s-maxage=0' header
2264 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache' header
2265 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie"' header
2266 - those with a 'Cache-control: no-cache="set-cookie,' header
2267 (allowing other fields after set-cookie)
2268
2269 If a response doesn't respect these requirements, then it will be blocked
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01002270 just as if it was from an "rspdeny" filter, with an "HTTP 502 bad gateway".
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002271 The session state shows "PH--" meaning that the proxy blocked the response
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002272 during headers processing. Additionally, an alert will be sent in the logs so
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002273 that admins are informed that there's something to be fixed.
2274
2275 Due to the high impact on the application, the application should be tested
2276 in depth with the option enabled before going to production. It is also a
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002277 good practice to always activate it during tests, even if it is not used in
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002278 production, as it will report potentially dangerous application behaviours.
2279
2280 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2281 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2282
2283
2284option clitcpka
2285no option clitcpka
2286 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the client side
2287 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2288 yes | yes | yes | no
2289 Arguments : none
2290
2291 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
2292 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
2293 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
2294 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
2295
2296 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
2297 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
2298 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
2299 operating system and its tuning parameters.
2300
2301 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
2302 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
2303 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
2304 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
2305 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
2306
2307 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
2308
2309 Using option "clitcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
2310 client side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
2311 noticed between HAProxy and a client.
2312
2313 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2314 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2315
2316 See also : "option srvtcpka", "option tcpka"
2317
2318
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01002319option contstats
2320 Enable continuous traffic statistics updates
2321 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2322 yes | yes | yes | no
2323 Arguments : none
2324
2325 By default, counters used for statistics calculation are incremented
2326 only when a session finishes. It works quite well when serving small
2327 objects, but with big ones (for example large images or archives) or
2328 with A/V streaming, a graph generated from haproxy counters looks like
2329 a hedgehog. With this option enabled counters get incremented continuously,
2330 during a whole session. Recounting touches a hotpath directly so
2331 it is not enabled by default, as it has small performance impact (~0.5%).
2332
2333
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002334option dontlog-normal
2335no option dontlog-normal
2336 Enable or disable logging of normal, successful connections
2337 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2338 yes | yes | yes | no
2339 Arguments : none
2340
2341 There are large sites dealing with several thousand connections per second
2342 and for which logging is a major pain. Some of them are even forced to turn
2343 logs off and cannot debug production issues. Setting this option ensures that
2344 normal connections, those which experience no error, no timeout, no retry nor
2345 redispatch, will not be logged. This leaves disk space for anomalies. In HTTP
2346 mode, the response status code is checked and return codes 5xx will still be
2347 logged.
2348
2349 It is strongly discouraged to use this option as most of the time, the key to
2350 complex issues is in the normal logs which will not be logged here. If you
2351 need to separate logs, see the "log-separate-errors" option instead.
2352
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002353 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "log-separate-errors" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002354 logging.
2355
2356
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002357option dontlognull
2358no option dontlognull
2359 Enable or disable logging of null connections
2360 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2361 yes | yes | yes | no
2362 Arguments : none
2363
2364 In certain environments, there are components which will regularly connect to
2365 various systems to ensure that they are still alive. It can be the case from
2366 another load balancer as well as from monitoring systems. By default, even a
2367 simple port probe or scan will produce a log. If those connections pollute
2368 the logs too much, it is possible to enable option "dontlognull" to indicate
2369 that a connection on which no data has been transferred will not be logged,
2370 which typically corresponds to those probes.
2371
2372 It is generally recommended not to use this option in uncontrolled
2373 environments (eg: internet), otherwise scans and other malicious activities
2374 would not be logged.
2375
2376 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2377 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2378
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002379 See also : "log", "monitor-net", "monitor-uri" and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002380
2381
2382option forceclose
2383no option forceclose
2384 Enable or disable active connection closing after response is transferred.
2385 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2386 yes | no | yes | yes
2387 Arguments : none
2388
2389 Some HTTP servers do not necessarily close the connections when they receive
2390 the "Connection: close" set by "option httpclose", and if the client does not
2391 close either, then the connection remains open till the timeout expires. This
2392 causes high number of simultaneous connections on the servers and shows high
2393 global session times in the logs.
2394
2395 When this happens, it is possible to use "option forceclose". It will
2396 actively close the outgoing server channel as soon as the server begins to
2397 reply and only if the request buffer is empty. Note that this should NOT be
2398 used if CONNECT requests are expected between the client and the server. This
2399 option implicitly enables the "httpclose" option.
2400
2401 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2402 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2403
2404 See also : "option httpclose"
2405
2406
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002407option forwardfor [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002408 Enable insertion of the X-Forwarded-For header to requests sent to servers
2409 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2410 yes | yes | yes | yes
2411 Arguments :
2412 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2413 matching <network>
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002414 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Forwarded-For"
2415 header name.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002416
2417 Since HAProxy works in reverse-proxy mode, the servers see its IP address as
2418 their client address. This is sometimes annoying when the client's IP address
2419 is expected in server logs. To solve this problem, the well-known HTTP header
2420 "X-Forwarded-For" may be added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server.
2421 This header contains a value representing the client's IP address. Since this
2422 header is always appended at the end of the existing header list, the server
2423 must be configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. See
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002424 the server's manual to find how to enable use of this standard header. Note
2425 that only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2426 possible that the client has already brought one.
2427
2428 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
2429 the default "X-Forwarded-For". This can be useful where you might already
2430 have a "X-Forwarded-For" header from a different application (eg: stunnel),
2431 and you need preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the
2432 "X-Forwarded-For" header and requires different one (eg: Zeus Web Servers
2433 require "X-Cluster-Client-IP").
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002434
2435 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2436 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2437 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2438 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2439 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2440 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2441 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2442
2443 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002444 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2445 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2446 both are defined.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002447
2448 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2449 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2450 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2451 when using this option.
2452
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002453 Examples :
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002454 # Public HTTP address also used by stunnel on the same machine
2455 frontend www
2456 mode http
2457 option forwardfor except 127.0.0.1 # stunnel already adds the header
2458
Ross Westaf72a1d2008-08-03 10:51:45 +02002459 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client
2460 backend www
2461 mode http
2462 option forwardfor header X-Client
2463
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002464 See also : "option httpclose"
2465
2466
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002467option httpchk
2468option httpchk <uri>
2469option httpchk <method> <uri>
2470option httpchk <method> <uri> <version>
2471 Enable HTTP protocol to check on the servers health
2472 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2473 yes | no | yes | yes
2474 Arguments :
2475 <method> is the optional HTTP method used with the requests. When not set,
2476 the "OPTIONS" method is used, as it generally requires low server
2477 processing and is easy to filter out from the logs. Any method
2478 may be used, though it is not recommended to invent non-standard
2479 ones.
2480
2481 <uri> is the URI referenced in the HTTP requests. It defaults to " / "
2482 which is accessible by default on almost any server, but may be
2483 changed to any other URI. Query strings are permitted.
2484
2485 <version> is the optional HTTP version string. It defaults to "HTTP/1.0"
2486 but some servers might behave incorrectly in HTTP 1.0, so turning
2487 it to HTTP/1.1 may sometimes help. Note that the Host field is
2488 mandatory in HTTP/1.1, and as a trick, it is possible to pass it
2489 after "\r\n" following the version string.
2490
2491 By default, server health checks only consist in trying to establish a TCP
2492 connection. When "option httpchk" is specified, a complete HTTP request is
2493 sent once the TCP connection is established, and responses 2xx and 3xx are
2494 considered valid, while all other ones indicate a server failure, including
2495 the lack of any response.
2496
2497 The port and interval are specified in the server configuration.
2498
2499 This option does not necessarily require an HTTP backend, it also works with
2500 plain TCP backends. This is particularly useful to check simple scripts bound
2501 to some dedicated ports using the inetd daemon.
2502
2503 Examples :
2504 # Relay HTTPS traffic to Apache instance and check service availability
2505 # using HTTP request "OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1" on port 80.
2506 backend https_relay
2507 mode tcp
Willy Tarreauebaf21a2008-03-21 20:17:14 +01002508 option httpchk OPTIONS * HTTP/1.1\r\nHost:\ www
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002509 server apache1 192.168.1.1:443 check port 80
2510
2511 See also : "option ssl-hello-chk", "option smtpchk", "http-check" and the
2512 "check", "port" and "interval" server options.
2513
2514
2515option httpclose
2516no option httpclose
2517 Enable or disable passive HTTP connection closing
2518 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2519 yes | yes | yes | yes
2520 Arguments : none
2521
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002522 As stated in section 1, HAProxy does not yes support the HTTP keep-alive
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002523 mode. So by default, if a client communicates with a server in this mode, it
2524 will only analyze, log, and process the first request of each connection. To
2525 workaround this limitation, it is possible to specify "option httpclose". It
2526 will check if a "Connection: close" header is already set in each direction,
2527 and will add one if missing. Each end should react to this by actively
2528 closing the TCP connection after each transfer, thus resulting in a switch to
2529 the HTTP close mode. Any "Connection" header different from "close" will also
2530 be removed.
2531
2532 It seldom happens that some servers incorrectly ignore this header and do not
2533 close the connection eventough they reply "Connection: close". For this
2534 reason, they are not compatible with older HTTP 1.0 browsers. If this
2535 happens it is possible to use the "option forceclose" which actively closes
2536 the request connection once the server responds.
2537
2538 This option may be set both in a frontend and in a backend. It is enabled if
2539 at least one of the frontend or backend holding a connection has it enabled.
2540 If "option forceclose" is specified too, it has precedence over "httpclose".
2541
2542 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2543 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2544
2545 See also : "option forceclose"
2546
2547
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002548option httplog [ clf ]
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002549 Enable logging of HTTP request, session state and timers
2550 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2551 yes | yes | yes | yes
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002552 Arguments :
2553 clf if the "clf" argument is added, then the output format will be
2554 the CLF format instead of HAProxy's default HTTP format. You can
2555 use this when you need to feed HAProxy's logs through a specific
2556 log analyser which only support the CLF format and which is not
2557 extensible.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002558
2559 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
2560 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
2561 "option httplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including,
2562 but not limited to, the HTTP request, the connection timers, the session
2563 status, the connections numbers, the captured headers and cookies, the
2564 frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source address and
2565 ports.
2566
2567 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
2568
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02002569 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2570 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it. Specifying
2571 only "option httplog" will automatically clear the 'clf' mode if it was set
2572 by default.
2573
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002574 See also : section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002575
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002576
2577option http_proxy
2578no option http_proxy
2579 Enable or disable plain HTTP proxy mode
2580 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2581 yes | yes | yes | yes
2582 Arguments : none
2583
2584 It sometimes happens that people need a pure HTTP proxy which understands
2585 basic proxy requests without caching nor any fancy feature. In this case,
2586 it may be worth setting up an HAProxy instance with the "option http_proxy"
2587 set. In this mode, no server is declared, and the connection is forwarded to
2588 the IP address and port found in the URL after the "http://" scheme.
2589
2590 No host address resolution is performed, so this only works when pure IP
2591 addresses are passed. Since this option's usage perimeter is rather limited,
2592 it will probably be used only by experts who know they need exactly it. Last,
2593 if the clients are susceptible of sending keep-alive requests, it will be
2594 needed to add "option http_close" to ensure that all requests will correctly
2595 be analyzed.
2596
2597 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2598 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2599
2600 Example :
2601 # this backend understands HTTP proxy requests and forwards them directly.
2602 backend direct_forward
2603 option httpclose
2604 option http_proxy
2605
2606 See also : "option httpclose"
2607
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002608
Willy Tarreauf27b5ea2009-10-03 22:01:18 +02002609option independant-streams
2610no option independant-streams
2611 Enable or disable independant timeout processing for both directions
2612 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2613 yes | yes | yes | yes
2614 Arguments : none
2615
2616 By default, when data is sent over a socket, both the write timeout and the
2617 read timeout for that socket are refreshed, because we consider that there is
2618 activity on that socket, and we have no other means of guessing if we should
2619 receive data or not.
2620
2621 While this default behaviour is desirable for almost all applications, there
2622 exists a situation where it is desirable to disable it, and only refresh the
2623 read timeout if there are incoming data. This happens on sessions with large
2624 timeouts and low amounts of exchanged data such as telnet session. If the
2625 server suddenly disappears, the output data accumulates in the system's
2626 socket buffers, both timeouts are correctly refreshed, and there is no way
2627 to know the server does not receive them, so we don't timeout. However, when
2628 the underlying protocol always echoes sent data, it would be enough by itself
2629 to detect the issue using the read timeout. Note that this problem does not
2630 happen with more verbose protocols because data won't accumulate long in the
2631 socket buffers.
2632
2633 When this option is set on the frontend, it will disable read timeout updates
2634 on data sent to the client. There probably is little use of this case. When
2635 the option is set on the backend, it will disable read timeout updates on
2636 data sent to the server. Doing so will typically break large HTTP posts from
2637 slow lines, so use it with caution.
2638
2639 See also : "timeout client" and "timeout server"
2640
2641
Willy Tarreau211ad242009-10-03 21:45:07 +02002642option log-health-checks
2643no option log-health-checks
2644 Enable or disable logging of health checks
2645 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2646 yes | no | yes | yes
2647 Arguments : none
2648
2649 Enable health checks logging so it possible to check for example what
2650 was happening before a server crash. Failed health check are logged if
2651 server is UP and succeeded health checks if server is DOWN, so the amount
2652 of additional information is limited.
2653
2654 If health check logging is enabled no health check status is printed
2655 when servers is set up UP/DOWN/ENABLED/DISABLED.
2656
2657 See also: "log" and section 8 about logging.
2658
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002659
2660option log-separate-errors
2661no option log-separate-errors
2662 Change log level for non-completely successful connections
2663 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2664 yes | yes | yes | no
2665 Arguments : none
2666
2667 Sometimes looking for errors in logs is not easy. This option makes haproxy
2668 raise the level of logs containing potentially interesting information such
2669 as errors, timeouts, retries, redispatches, or HTTP status codes 5xx. The
2670 level changes from "info" to "err". This makes it possible to log them
2671 separately to a different file with most syslog daemons. Be careful not to
2672 remove them from the original file, otherwise you would lose ordering which
2673 provides very important information.
2674
2675 Using this option, large sites dealing with several thousand connections per
2676 second may log normal traffic to a rotating buffer and only archive smaller
2677 error logs.
2678
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002679 See also : "log", "dontlognull", "dontlog-normal" and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02002680 logging.
2681
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002682
2683option logasap
2684no option logasap
2685 Enable or disable early logging of HTTP requests
2686 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2687 yes | yes | yes | no
2688 Arguments : none
2689
2690 By default, HTTP requests are logged upon termination so that the total
2691 transfer time and the number of bytes appear in the logs. When large objects
2692 are being transferred, it may take a while before the request appears in the
2693 logs. Using "option logasap", the request gets logged as soon as the server
2694 sends the complete headers. The only missing information in the logs will be
2695 the total number of bytes which will indicate everything except the amount
2696 of data transferred, and the total time which will not take the transfer
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01002697 time into account. In such a situation, it's a good practice to capture the
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002698 "Content-Length" response header so that the logs at least indicate how many
2699 bytes are expected to be transferred.
2700
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01002701 Examples :
2702 listen http_proxy 0.0.0.0:80
2703 mode http
2704 option httplog
2705 option logasap
2706 log 192.168.2.200 local3
2707
2708 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
2709 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
2710 static/srv1 9/10/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/1/1/1/0 1/0 \
2711 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
2712
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02002713 See also : "option httplog", "capture response header", and section 8 about
Willy Tarreauc27debf2008-01-06 08:57:02 +01002714 logging.
2715
2716
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002717option nolinger
2718no option nolinger
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002719 Enable or disable immediate session resource cleaning after close
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002720 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2721 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01002722 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002723
2724 When clients or servers abort connections in a dirty way (eg: they are
2725 physically disconnected), the session timeouts triggers and the session is
2726 closed. But it will remain in FIN_WAIT1 state for some time in the system,
2727 using some resources and possibly limiting the ability to establish newer
2728 connections.
2729
2730 When this happens, it is possible to activate "option nolinger" which forces
2731 the system to immediately remove any socket's pending data on close. Thus,
2732 the session is instantly purged from the system's tables. This usually has
2733 side effects such as increased number of TCP resets due to old retransmits
2734 getting immediately rejected. Some firewalls may sometimes complain about
2735 this too.
2736
2737 For this reason, it is not recommended to use this option when not absolutely
2738 needed. You know that you need it when you have thousands of FIN_WAIT1
2739 sessions on your system (TIME_WAIT ones do not count).
2740
2741 This option may be used both on frontends and backends, depending on the side
2742 where it is required. Use it on the frontend for clients, and on the backend
2743 for servers.
2744
2745 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2746 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2747
2748
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02002749option originalto [ except <network> ] [ header <name> ]
2750 Enable insertion of the X-Original-To header to requests sent to servers
2751 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2752 yes | yes | yes | yes
2753 Arguments :
2754 <network> is an optional argument used to disable this option for sources
2755 matching <network>
2756 <name> an optional argument to specify a different "X-Original-To"
2757 header name.
2758
2759 Since HAProxy can work in transparent mode, every request from a client can
2760 be redirected to the proxy and HAProxy itself can proxy every request to a
2761 complex SQUID environment and the destination host from SO_ORIGINAL_DST will
2762 be lost. This is annoying when you want access rules based on destination ip
2763 addresses. To solve this problem, a new HTTP header "X-Original-To" may be
2764 added by HAProxy to all requests sent to the server. This header contains a
2765 value representing the original destination IP address. Since this must be
2766 configured to always use the last occurrence of this header only. Note that
2767 only the last occurrence of the header must be used, since it is really
2768 possible that the client has already brought one.
2769
2770 The keyword "header" may be used to supply a different header name to replace
2771 the default "X-Original-To". This can be useful where you might already
2772 have a "X-Original-To" header from a different application, and you need
2773 preserve it. Also if your backend server doesn't use the "X-Original-To"
2774 header and requires different one.
2775
2776 Sometimes, a same HAProxy instance may be shared between a direct client
2777 access and a reverse-proxy access (for instance when an SSL reverse-proxy is
2778 used to decrypt HTTPS traffic). It is possible to disable the addition of the
2779 header for a known source address or network by adding the "except" keyword
2780 followed by the network address. In this case, any source IP matching the
2781 network will not cause an addition of this header. Most common uses are with
2782 private networks or 127.0.0.1.
2783
2784 This option may be specified either in the frontend or in the backend. If at
2785 least one of them uses it, the header will be added. Note that the backend's
2786 setting of the header subargument takes precedence over the frontend's if
2787 both are defined.
2788
2789 It is important to note that as long as HAProxy does not support keep-alive
2790 connections, only the first request of a connection will receive the header.
2791 For this reason, it is important to ensure that "option httpclose" is set
2792 when using this option.
2793
2794 Examples :
2795 # Original Destination address
2796 frontend www
2797 mode http
2798 option originalto except 127.0.0.1
2799
2800 # Those servers want the IP Address in X-Client-Dst
2801 backend www
2802 mode http
2803 option originalto header X-Client-Dst
2804
2805 See also : "option httpclose"
2806
2807
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002808option persist
2809no option persist
2810 Enable or disable forced persistence on down servers
2811 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2812 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01002813 Arguments : none
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002814
2815 When an HTTP request reaches a backend with a cookie which references a dead
2816 server, by default it is redispatched to another server. It is possible to
2817 force the request to be sent to the dead server first using "option persist"
2818 if absolutely needed. A common use case is when servers are under extreme
2819 load and spend their time flapping. In this case, the users would still be
2820 directed to the server they opened the session on, in the hope they would be
2821 correctly served. It is recommended to use "option redispatch" in conjunction
2822 with this option so that in the event it would not be possible to connect to
2823 the server at all (server definitely dead), the client would finally be
2824 redirected to another valid server.
2825
2826 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2827 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2828
2829 See also : "option redispatch", "retries"
2830
2831
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01002832option redispatch
2833no option redispatch
2834 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
2835 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2836 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01002837 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01002838
2839 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
2840 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
2841 be able to access the service anymore.
2842
2843 Specifying "option redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their
2844 persistence and redistribute them to a working server.
2845
2846 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
2847 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
2848 value.
2849
2850 This form is the preferred form, which replaces both the "redispatch" and
2851 "redisp" keywords.
2852
2853 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2854 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2855
2856 See also : "redispatch", "retries"
2857
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01002858
2859option smtpchk
2860option smtpchk <hello> <domain>
2861 Use SMTP health checks for server testing
2862 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2863 yes | no | yes | yes
2864 Arguments :
2865 <hello> is an optional argument. It is the "hello" command to use. It can
2866 be either "HELO" (for SMTP) or "EHLO" (for ESTMP). All other
2867 values will be turned into the default command ("HELO").
2868
2869 <domain> is the domain name to present to the server. It may only be
2870 specified (and is mandatory) if the hello command has been
2871 specified. By default, "localhost" is used.
2872
2873 When "option smtpchk" is set, the health checks will consist in TCP
2874 connections followed by an SMTP command. By default, this command is
2875 "HELO localhost". The server's return code is analyzed and only return codes
2876 starting with a "2" will be considered as valid. All other responses,
2877 including a lack of response will constitute an error and will indicate a
2878 dead server.
2879
2880 This test is meant to be used with SMTP servers or relays. Depending on the
2881 request, it is possible that some servers do not log each connection attempt,
2882 so you may want to experiment to improve the behaviour. Using telnet on port
2883 25 is often easier than adjusting the configuration.
2884
2885 Most often, an incoming SMTP server needs to see the client's IP address for
2886 various purposes, including spam filtering, anti-spoofing and logging. When
2887 possible, it is often wise to masquerade the client's IP address when
2888 connecting to the server using the "usesrc" argument of the "source" keyword,
2889 which requires the cttproxy feature to be compiled in.
2890
2891 Example :
2892 option smtpchk HELO mydomain.org
2893
2894 See also : "option httpchk", "source"
2895
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01002896
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02002897option socket-stats
2898no option socket-stats
2899
2900 Enable or disable collecting & providing separate statistics for each socket.
2901 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2902 yes | yes | yes | no
2903
2904 Arguments : none
2905
2906
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01002907option splice-auto
2908no option splice-auto
2909 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets in both directions
2910 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2911 yes | yes | yes | yes
2912 Arguments : none
2913
2914 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
2915 will automatically evaluate the opportunity to use kernel tcp splicing to
2916 forward data between the client and the server, in either direction. Haproxy
2917 uses heuristics to estimate if kernel splicing might improve performance or
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01002918 not. Both directions are handled independently. Note that the heuristics used
Willy Tarreauff4f82d2009-02-06 11:28:13 +01002919 are not much aggressive in order to limit excessive use of splicing. This
2920 option requires splicing to be enabled at compile time, and may be globally
2921 disabled with the global option "nosplice". Since splice uses pipes, using it
2922 requires that there are enough spare pipes.
2923
2924 Important note: kernel-based TCP splicing is a Linux-specific feature which
2925 first appeared in kernel 2.6.25. It offers kernel-based acceleration to
2926 transfer data between sockets without copying these data to user-space, thus
2927 providing noticeable performance gains and CPU cycles savings. Since many
2928 early implementations are buggy, corrupt data and/or are inefficient, this
2929 feature is not enabled by default, and it should be used with extreme care.
2930 While it is not possible to detect the correctness of an implementation,
2931 2.6.29 is the first version offering a properly working implementation. In
2932 case of doubt, splicing may be globally disabled using the global "nosplice"
2933 keyword.
2934
2935 Example :
2936 option splice-auto
2937
2938 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2939 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2940
2941 See also : "option splice-request", "option splice-response", and global
2942 options "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
2943
2944
2945option splice-request
2946no option splice-request
2947 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for requests
2948 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2949 yes | yes | yes | yes
2950 Arguments : none
2951
2952 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
2953 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
2954 the client to the server. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
2955 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
2956 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
2957 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
2958
2959 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
2960
2961 Example :
2962 option splice-request
2963
2964 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2965 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2966
2967 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-response", and global options
2968 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
2969
2970
2971option splice-response
2972no option splice-response
2973 Enable or disable automatic kernel acceleration on sockets for responses
2974 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
2975 yes | yes | yes | yes
2976 Arguments : none
2977
2978 When this option is enabled either on a frontend or on a backend, haproxy
2979 will user kernel tcp splicing whenever possible to forward data going from
2980 the server to the client. It might still use the recv/send scheme if there
2981 are no spare pipes left. This option requires splicing to be enabled at
2982 compile time, and may be globally disabled with the global option "nosplice".
2983 Since splice uses pipes, using it requires that there are enough spare pipes.
2984
2985 Important note: see "option splice-auto" for usage limitations.
2986
2987 Example :
2988 option splice-response
2989
2990 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
2991 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
2992
2993 See also : "option splice-auto", "option splice-request", and global options
2994 "nosplice" and "maxpipes"
2995
2996
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01002997option srvtcpka
2998no option srvtcpka
2999 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on the server side
3000 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3001 yes | no | yes | yes
3002 Arguments : none
3003
3004 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3005 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3006 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3007 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3008
3009 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3010 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3011 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3012 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3013
3014 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3015 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3016 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3017 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3018 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3019
3020 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3021
3022 Using option "srvtcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on the
3023 server side of a connection, which should help when session expirations are
3024 noticed between HAProxy and a server.
3025
3026 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3027 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3028
3029 See also : "option clitcpka", "option tcpka"
3030
3031
Willy Tarreaua453bdd2008-01-08 19:50:52 +01003032option ssl-hello-chk
3033 Use SSLv3 client hello health checks for server testing
3034 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3035 yes | no | yes | yes
3036 Arguments : none
3037
3038 When some SSL-based protocols are relayed in TCP mode through HAProxy, it is
3039 possible to test that the server correctly talks SSL instead of just testing
3040 that it accepts the TCP connection. When "option ssl-hello-chk" is set, pure
3041 SSLv3 client hello messages are sent once the connection is established to
3042 the server, and the response is analyzed to find an SSL server hello message.
3043 The server is considered valid only when the response contains this server
3044 hello message.
3045
3046 All servers tested till there correctly reply to SSLv3 client hello messages,
3047 and most servers tested do not even log the requests containing only hello
3048 messages, which is appreciable.
3049
3050 See also: "option httpchk"
3051
3052
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003053option tcp-smart-accept
3054no option tcp-smart-accept
3055 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the accept sequence
3056 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3057 yes | yes | yes | no
3058 Arguments : none
3059
3060 When an HTTP connection request comes in, the system acknowledges it on
3061 behalf of HAProxy, then the client immediately sends its request, and the
3062 system acknowledges it too while it is notifying HAProxy about the new
3063 connection. HAProxy then reads the request and responds. This means that we
3064 have one TCP ACK sent by the system for nothing, because the request could
3065 very well be acknowledged by HAProxy when it sends its response.
3066
3067 For this reason, in HTTP mode, HAProxy automatically asks the system to avoid
3068 sending this useless ACK on platforms which support it (currently at least
3069 Linux). It must not cause any problem, because the system will send it anyway
3070 after 40 ms if the response takes more time than expected to come.
3071
3072 During complex network debugging sessions, it may be desirable to disable
3073 this optimization because delayed ACKs can make troubleshooting more complex
3074 when trying to identify where packets are delayed. It is then possible to
3075 fall back to normal behaviour by specifying "no option tcp-smart-accept".
3076
3077 It is also possible to force it for non-HTTP proxies by simply specifying
3078 "option tcp-smart-accept". For instance, it can make sense with some services
3079 such as SMTP where the server speaks first.
3080
3081 It is recommended to avoid forcing this option in a defaults section. In case
3082 of doubt, consider setting it back to automatic values by prepending the
3083 "default" keyword before it, or disabling it using the "no" keyword.
3084
Willy Tarreaud88edf22009-06-14 15:48:17 +02003085 See also : "option tcp-smart-connect"
3086
3087
3088option tcp-smart-connect
3089no option tcp-smart-connect
3090 Enable or disable the saving of one ACK packet during the connect sequence
3091 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3092 yes | no | yes | yes
3093 Arguments : none
3094
3095 On certain systems (at least Linux), HAProxy can ask the kernel not to
3096 immediately send an empty ACK upon a connection request, but to directly
3097 send the buffer request instead. This saves one packet on the network and
3098 thus boosts performance. It can also be useful for some servers, because they
3099 immediately get the request along with the incoming connection.
3100
3101 This feature is enabled when "option tcp-smart-connect" is set in a backend.
3102 It is not enabled by default because it makes network troubleshooting more
3103 complex.
3104
3105 It only makes sense to enable it with protocols where the client speaks first
3106 such as HTTP. In other situations, if there is no data to send in place of
3107 the ACK, a normal ACK is sent.
3108
3109 If this option has been enabled in a "defaults" section, it can be disabled
3110 in a specific instance by prepending the "no" keyword before it.
3111
3112 See also : "option tcp-smart-accept"
3113
Willy Tarreau9ea05a72009-06-14 12:07:01 +02003114
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003115option tcpka
3116 Enable or disable the sending of TCP keepalive packets on both sides
3117 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3118 yes | yes | yes | yes
3119 Arguments : none
3120
3121 When there is a firewall or any session-aware component between a client and
3122 a server, and when the protocol involves very long sessions with long idle
3123 periods (eg: remote desktops), there is a risk that one of the intermediate
3124 components decides to expire a session which has remained idle for too long.
3125
3126 Enabling socket-level TCP keep-alives makes the system regularly send packets
3127 to the other end of the connection, leaving it active. The delay between
3128 keep-alive probes is controlled by the system only and depends both on the
3129 operating system and its tuning parameters.
3130
3131 It is important to understand that keep-alive packets are neither emitted nor
3132 received at the application level. It is only the network stacks which sees
3133 them. For this reason, even if one side of the proxy already uses keep-alives
3134 to maintain its connection alive, those keep-alive packets will not be
3135 forwarded to the other side of the proxy.
3136
3137 Please note that this has nothing to do with HTTP keep-alive.
3138
3139 Using option "tcpka" enables the emission of TCP keep-alive probes on both
3140 the client and server sides of a connection. Note that this is meaningful
3141 only in "defaults" or "listen" sections. If this option is used in a
3142 frontend, only the client side will get keep-alives, and if this option is
3143 used in a backend, only the server side will get keep-alives. For this
3144 reason, it is strongly recommended to explicitly use "option clitcpka" and
3145 "option srvtcpka" when the configuration is split between frontends and
3146 backends.
3147
3148 See also : "option clitcpka", "option srvtcpka"
3149
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003150
3151option tcplog
3152 Enable advanced logging of TCP connections with session state and timers
3153 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3154 yes | yes | yes | yes
3155 Arguments : none
3156
3157 By default, the log output format is very poor, as it only contains the
3158 source and destination addresses, and the instance name. By specifying
3159 "option tcplog", each log line turns into a much richer format including, but
3160 not limited to, the connection timers, the session status, the connections
3161 numbers, the frontend, backend and server name, and of course the source
3162 address and ports. This option is useful for pure TCP proxies in order to
3163 find which of the client or server disconnects or times out. For normal HTTP
3164 proxies, it's better to use "option httplog" which is even more complete.
3165
3166 This option may be set either in the frontend or the backend.
3167
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003168 See also : "option httplog", and section 8 about logging.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003169
3170
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003171option transparent
3172no option transparent
3173 Enable client-side transparent proxying
3174 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01003175 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003176 Arguments : none
3177
3178 This option was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer 3
3179 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
3180 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
3181 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
3182 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
3183 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
3184 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
3185 appropriate server.
3186
3187 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
3188 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
3189
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003190 See also: the "usersrc" argument of the "source" keyword, and the
3191 "transparent" option of the "bind" keyword.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003192
Willy Tarreaubf1f8162007-12-28 17:42:56 +01003193
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003194persist rdp-cookie
3195persist rdp-cookie(name)
3196 Enable RDP cookie-based persistence
3197 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3198 yes | no | yes | yes
3199 Arguments :
3200 <name> is the optional name of the RDP cookie to check. If omitted, the
3201 default cookie name "mstshash" will be used. There currently is
3202 no valid reason to change this name.
3203
3204 This statement enables persistence based on an RDP cookie. The RDP cookie
3205 contains all information required to find the server in the list of known
3206 servers. So when this option is set in the backend, the request is analysed
3207 and if an RDP cookie is found, it is decoded. If it matches a known server
3208 which is still UP (or if "option persist" is set), then the connection is
3209 forwarded to this server.
3210
3211 Note that this only makes sense in a TCP backend, but for this to work, the
3212 frontend must have waited long enough to ensure that an RDP cookie is present
3213 in the request buffer. This is the same requirement as with the "rdp-cookie"
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01003214 load-balancing method. Thus it is highly recommended to put all statements in
Emeric Brun647caf12009-06-30 17:57:00 +02003215 a single "listen" section.
3216
3217 Example :
3218 listen tse-farm
3219 bind :3389
3220 # wait up to 5s for an RDP cookie in the request
3221 tcp-request inspect-delay 5s
3222 tcp-request content accept if RDP_COOKIE
3223 # apply RDP cookie persistence
3224 persist rdp-cookie
3225 # if server is unknown, let's balance on the same cookie.
3226 # alternatively, "balance leastconn" may be useful too.
3227 balance rdp-cookie
3228 server srv1 1.1.1.1:3389
3229 server srv2 1.1.1.2:3389
3230
3231 See also : "balance rdp-cookie", "tcp-request" and the "req_rdp_cookie" ACL.
3232
3233
Willy Tarreau3a7d2072009-03-05 23:48:25 +01003234rate-limit sessions <rate>
3235 Set a limit on the number of new sessions accepted per second on a frontend
3236 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3237 yes | yes | yes | no
3238 Arguments :
3239 <rate> The <rate> parameter is an integer designating the maximum number
3240 of new sessions per second to accept on the frontend.
3241
3242 When the frontend reaches the specified number of new sessions per second, it
3243 stops accepting new connections until the rate drops below the limit again.
3244 During this time, the pending sessions will be kept in the socket's backlog
3245 (in system buffers) and haproxy will not even be aware that sessions are
3246 pending. When applying very low limit on a highly loaded service, it may make
3247 sense to increase the socket's backlog using the "backlog" keyword.
3248
3249 This feature is particularly efficient at blocking connection-based attacks
3250 or service abuse on fragile servers. Since the session rate is measured every
3251 millisecond, it is extremely accurate. Also, the limit applies immediately,
3252 no delay is needed at all to detect the threshold.
3253
3254 Example : limit the connection rate on SMTP to 10 per second max
3255 listen smtp
3256 mode tcp
3257 bind :25
3258 rate-limit sessions 10
3259 server 127.0.0.1:1025
3260
3261 Note : when the maximum rate is reached, the frontend's status appears as
3262 "FULL" in the statistics, exactly as when it is saturated.
3263
3264 See also : the "backlog" keyword and the "fe_sess_rate" ACL criterion.
3265
3266
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003267redirect location <to> [code <code>] <option> {if | unless} <condition>
3268redirect prefix <to> [code <code>] <option> {if | unless} <condition>
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003269 Return an HTTP redirection if/unless a condition is matched
3270 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3271 no | yes | yes | yes
3272
3273 If/unless the condition is matched, the HTTP request will lead to a redirect
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003274 response.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003275
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003276 Arguments :
3277 <to> With "redirect location", the exact value in <to> is placed into
3278 the HTTP "Location" header. In case of "redirect prefix", the
3279 "Location" header is built from the concatenation of <to> and the
3280 complete URI, including the query string, unless the "drop-query"
Willy Tarreaufe651a52008-11-19 21:15:17 +01003281 option is specified (see below). As a special case, if <to>
3282 equals exactly "/" in prefix mode, then nothing is inserted
3283 before the original URI. It allows one to redirect to the same
3284 URL.
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003285
3286 <code> The code is optional. It indicates which type of HTTP redirection
3287 is desired. Only codes 301, 302 and 303 are supported, and 302 is
3288 used if no code is specified. 301 means "Moved permanently", and
3289 a browser may cache the Location. 302 means "Moved permanently"
3290 and means that the browser should not cache the redirection. 303
3291 is equivalent to 302 except that the browser will fetch the
3292 location with a GET method.
3293
3294 <option> There are several options which can be specified to adjust the
3295 expected behaviour of a redirection :
3296
3297 - "drop-query"
3298 When this keyword is used in a prefix-based redirection, then the
3299 location will be set without any possible query-string, which is useful
3300 for directing users to a non-secure page for instance. It has no effect
3301 with a location-type redirect.
3302
3303 - "set-cookie NAME[=value]"
3304 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "=value")
3305 to the response. This is sometimes used to indicate that a user has
3306 been seen, for instance to protect against some types of DoS. No other
3307 cookie option is added, so the cookie will be a session cookie. Note
3308 that for a browser, a sole cookie name without an equal sign is
3309 different from a cookie with an equal sign.
3310
3311 - "clear-cookie NAME[=]"
3312 A "Set-Cookie" header will be added with NAME (and optionally "="), but
3313 with the "Max-Age" attribute set to zero. This will tell the browser to
3314 delete this cookie. It is useful for instance on logout pages. It is
3315 important to note that clearing the cookie "NAME" will not remove a
3316 cookie set with "NAME=value". You have to clear the cookie "NAME=" for
3317 that, because the browser makes the difference.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003318
3319 Example: move the login URL only to HTTPS.
3320 acl clear dst_port 80
3321 acl secure dst_port 8080
3322 acl login_page url_beg /login
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003323 acl logout url_beg /logout
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003324 acl uid_given url_reg /login?userid=[^&]+
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003325 acl cookie_set hdr_sub(cookie) SEEN=1
3326
3327 redirect prefix https://mysite.com set-cookie SEEN=1 if !cookie_set
Willy Tarreau79da4692008-11-19 20:03:04 +01003328 redirect prefix https://mysite.com if login_page !secure
3329 redirect prefix http://mysite.com drop-query if login_page !uid_given
3330 redirect location http://mysite.com/ if !login_page secure
Willy Tarreau0140f252008-11-19 21:07:09 +01003331 redirect location / clear-cookie USERID= if logout
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003332
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003333 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreaub463dfb2008-06-07 23:08:56 +02003334
3335
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003336redisp (deprecated)
3337redispatch (deprecated)
3338 Enable or disable session redistribution in case of connection failure
3339 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3340 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003341 Arguments : none
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003342
3343 In HTTP mode, if a server designated by a cookie is down, clients may
3344 definitely stick to it because they cannot flush the cookie, so they will not
3345 be able to access the service anymore.
3346
3347 Specifying "redispatch" will allow the proxy to break their persistence and
3348 redistribute them to a working server.
3349
3350 It also allows to retry last connection to another server in case of multiple
3351 connection failures. Of course, it requires having "retries" set to a nonzero
3352 value.
3353
3354 This form is deprecated, do not use it in any new configuration, use the new
3355 "option redispatch" instead.
3356
3357 See also : "option redispatch"
3358
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003359
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003360reqadd <string>
3361 Add a header at the end of the HTTP request
3362 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3363 no | yes | yes | yes
3364 Arguments :
3365 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3366 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003367 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003368
3369 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3370 the last header of an HTTP request.
3371
3372 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3373 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3374 responses.
3375
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003376 See also: "rspadd" and section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003377
3378
3379reqallow <search>
3380reqiallow <search> (ignore case)
3381 Definitely allow an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3382 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3383 no | yes | yes | yes
3384 Arguments :
3385 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3386 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3387 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3388 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3389 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3390 "reqallow" keyword strictly matches case while "reqiallow"
3391 ignores case.
3392
3393 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3394 <search> will mark the request as allowed, even if any later test would
3395 result in a deny. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3396 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
3397 header names are not.
3398
3399 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3400 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3401
3402 Example :
3403 # allow www.* but refuse *.local
3404 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3405 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3406
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003407 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block" and section 6 about HTTP header
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003408 manipulation
3409
3410
3411reqdel <search>
3412reqidel <search> (ignore case)
3413 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP request
3414 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3415 no | yes | yes | yes
3416 Arguments :
3417 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3418 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3419 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3420 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3421 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqdel"
3422 keyword strictly matches case while "reqidel" ignores case.
3423
3424 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request
3425 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3426 and/or dangerous headers or cookies from a request before passing it to the
3427 next servers.
3428
3429 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3430 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3431 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3432
3433 Example :
3434 # remove X-Forwarded-For header and SERVER cookie
3435 reqidel ^X-Forwarded-For:.*
3436 reqidel ^Cookie:.*SERVER=
3437
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003438 See also: "reqadd", "reqrep", "rspdel" and section 6 about HTTP header
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003439 manipulation
3440
3441
3442reqdeny <search>
3443reqideny <search> (ignore case)
3444 Deny an HTTP request if a line matches a regular expression
3445 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3446 no | yes | yes | yes
3447 Arguments :
3448 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3449 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3450 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3451 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3452 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3453 "reqdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "reqideny" ignores
3454 case.
3455
3456 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3457 <search> will mark the request as denied, even if any later test would
3458 result in an allow. The test applies both to the request line and to request
3459 headers. Keep in mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while
3460 header names are not.
3461
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003462 A denied request will generate an "HTTP 403 forbidden" response once the
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003463 complete request has been parsed. This is consistent with what is practiced
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003464 using ACLs.
3465
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003466 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3467 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3468
3469 Example :
3470 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*
3471 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3472 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3473
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003474 See also: "reqallow", "rspdeny", "acl", "block" and section 6 about HTTP
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003475 header manipulation
3476
3477
3478reqpass <search>
3479reqipass <search> (ignore case)
3480 Ignore any HTTP request line matching a regular expression in next rules
3481 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3482 no | yes | yes | yes
3483 Arguments :
3484 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3485 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3486 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3487 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3488 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3489 "reqpass" keyword strictly matches case while "reqipass" ignores
3490 case.
3491
3492 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3493 <search> will skip next rules, without assigning any deny or allow verdict.
3494 The test applies both to the request line and to request headers. Keep in
3495 mind that URLs in request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3496
3497 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3498 Reqdeny, reqallow and reqpass should be avoided in new designs.
3499
3500 Example :
3501 # refuse *.local, then allow www.*, but ignore "www.private.local"
3502 reqipass ^Host:\ www.private\.local
3503 reqideny ^Host:\ .*\.local
3504 reqiallow ^Host:\ www\.
3505
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003506 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "acl", "block" and section 6 about HTTP
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003507 header manipulation
3508
3509
3510reqrep <search> <string>
3511reqirep <search> <string> (ignore case)
3512 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP request line
3513 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3514 no | yes | yes | yes
3515 Arguments :
3516 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3517 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3518 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3519 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3520 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The "reqrep"
3521 keyword strictly matches case while "reqirep" ignores case.
3522
3523 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3524 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3525 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3526 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003527 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003528
3529 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the request (both
3530 the request line and header lines) will be completely replaced with <string>.
3531 Most common use of this is to rewrite URLs or domain names in "Host" headers.
3532
3533 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3534 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3535 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3536 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that URLs in
3537 request line are case-sensitive while header names are not.
3538
3539 Example :
3540 # replace "/static/" with "/" at the beginning of any request path.
3541 reqrep ^([^\ ]*)\ /static/(.*) \1\ /\2
3542 # replace "www.mydomain.com" with "www" in the host name.
3543 reqirep ^Host:\ www.mydomain.com Host:\ www
3544
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003545 See also: "reqadd", "reqdel", "rsprep" and section 6 about HTTP header
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003546 manipulation
3547
3548
3549reqtarpit <search>
3550reqitarpit <search> (ignore case)
3551 Tarpit an HTTP request containing a line matching a regular expression
3552 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3553 no | yes | yes | yes
3554 Arguments :
3555 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3556 request line. This is an extended regular expression. Parenthesis
3557 grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash is required.
3558 Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using a backslash
3559 ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time. The
3560 "reqtarpit" keyword strictly matches case while "reqitarpit"
3561 ignores case.
3562
3563 A request containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3564 <search> will be tarpitted, which means that it will connect to nowhere, will
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003565 be kept open for a pre-defined time, then will return an HTTP error 500 so
3566 that the attacker does not suspect it has been tarpitted. The status 500 will
3567 be reported in the logs, but the completion flags will indicate "PT". The
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003568 delay is defined by "timeout tarpit", or "timeout connect" if the former is
3569 not set.
3570
3571 The goal of the tarpit is to slow down robots attacking servers with
3572 identifiable requests. Many robots limit their outgoing number of connections
3573 and stay connected waiting for a reply which can take several minutes to
3574 come. Depending on the environment and attack, it may be particularly
3575 efficient at reducing the load on the network and firewalls.
3576
3577 Example :
3578 # ignore user-agents reporting any flavour of "Mozilla" or "MSIE", but
3579 # block all others.
3580 reqipass ^User-Agent:\.*(Mozilla|MSIE)
3581 reqitarpit ^User-Agent:
3582
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003583 See also: "reqallow", "reqdeny", "reqpass", and section 6 about HTTP header
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003584 manipulation
3585
3586
Willy Tarreaue5c5ce92008-06-20 17:27:19 +02003587retries <value>
3588 Set the number of retries to perform on a server after a connection failure
3589 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3590 yes | no | yes | yes
3591 Arguments :
3592 <value> is the number of times a connection attempt should be retried on
3593 a server when a connection either is refused or times out. The
3594 default value is 3.
3595
3596 It is important to understand that this value applies to the number of
3597 connection attempts, not full requests. When a connection has effectively
3598 been established to a server, there will be no more retry.
3599
3600 In order to avoid immediate reconnections to a server which is restarting,
3601 a turn-around timer of 1 second is applied before a retry occurs.
3602
3603 When "option redispatch" is set, the last retry may be performed on another
3604 server even if a cookie references a different server.
3605
3606 See also : "option redispatch"
3607
3608
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003609rspadd <string>
3610 Add a header at the end of the HTTP response
3611 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3612 no | yes | yes | yes
3613 Arguments :
3614 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3615 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003616 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003617
3618 A new line consisting in <string> followed by a line feed will be added after
3619 the last header of an HTTP response.
3620
3621 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3622 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3623 responses.
3624
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003625 See also: "reqadd" and section 6 about HTTP header manipulation
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003626
3627
3628rspdel <search>
3629rspidel <search> (ignore case)
3630 Delete all headers matching a regular expression in an HTTP response
3631 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3632 no | yes | yes | yes
3633 Arguments :
3634 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3635 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3636 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3637 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3638 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3639 The "rspdel" keyword strictly matches case while "rspidel"
3640 ignores case.
3641
3642 Any header line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response
3643 will be completely deleted. Most common use of this is to remove unwanted
3644 and/or sensible headers or cookies from a response before passing it to the
3645 client.
3646
3647 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3648 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3649 responses. Keep in mind that header names are not case-sensitive.
3650
3651 Example :
3652 # remove the Server header from responses
3653 reqidel ^Server:.*
3654
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003655 See also: "rspadd", "rsprep", "reqdel" and section 6 about HTTP header
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003656 manipulation
3657
3658
3659rspdeny <search>
3660rspideny <search> (ignore case)
3661 Block an HTTP response if a line matches a regular expression
3662 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3663 no | yes | yes | yes
3664 Arguments :
3665 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3666 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3667 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3668 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3669 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3670 The "rspdeny" keyword strictly matches case while "rspideny"
3671 ignores case.
3672
3673 A response containing any line which matches extended regular expression
3674 <search> will mark the request as denied. The test applies both to the
3675 response line and to response headers. Keep in mind that header names are not
3676 case-sensitive.
3677
3678 Main use of this keyword is to prevent sensitive information leak and to
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01003679 block the response before it reaches the client. If a response is denied, it
3680 will be replaced with an HTTP 502 error so that the client never retrieves
3681 any sensitive data.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003682
3683 It is easier, faster and more powerful to use ACLs to write access policies.
3684 Rspdeny should be avoided in new designs.
3685
3686 Example :
3687 # Ensure that no content type matching ms-word will leak
3688 rspideny ^Content-type:\.*/ms-word
3689
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003690 See also: "reqdeny", "acl", "block" and section 6 about HTTP header
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003691 manipulation
3692
3693
3694rsprep <search> <string>
3695rspirep <search> <string> (ignore case)
3696 Replace a regular expression with a string in an HTTP response line
3697 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3698 no | yes | yes | yes
3699 Arguments :
3700 <search> is the regular expression applied to HTTP headers and to the
3701 response line. This is an extended regular expression, so
3702 parenthesis grouping is supported and no preliminary backslash
3703 is required. Any space or known delimiter must be escaped using
3704 a backslash ('\'). The pattern applies to a full line at a time.
3705 The "rsprep" keyword strictly matches case while "rspirep"
3706 ignores case.
3707
3708 <string> is the complete line to be added. Any space or known delimiter
3709 must be escaped using a backslash ('\'). References to matched
3710 pattern groups are possible using the common \N form, with N
3711 being a single digit between 0 and 9. Please refer to section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003712 6 about HTTP header manipulation for more information.
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003713
3714 Any line matching extended regular expression <search> in the response (both
3715 the response line and header lines) will be completely replaced with
3716 <string>. Most common use of this is to rewrite Location headers.
3717
3718 Header transformations only apply to traffic which passes through HAProxy,
3719 and not to traffic generated by HAProxy, such as health-checks or error
3720 responses. Note that for increased readability, it is suggested to add enough
3721 spaces between the request and the response. Keep in mind that header names
3722 are not case-sensitive.
3723
3724 Example :
3725 # replace "Location: 127.0.0.1:8080" with "Location: www.mydomain.com"
3726 rspirep ^Location:\ 127.0.0.1:8080 Location:\ www.mydomain.com
3727
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003728 See also: "rspadd", "rspdel", "reqrep" and section 6 about HTTP header
Willy Tarreau303c0352008-01-17 19:01:39 +01003729 manipulation
3730
3731
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003732server <name> <address>[:port] [param*]
3733 Declare a server in a backend
3734 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3735 no | no | yes | yes
3736 Arguments :
3737 <name> is the internal name assigned to this server. This name will
3738 appear in logs and alerts.
3739
3740 <address> is the IPv4 address of the server. Alternatively, a resolvable
3741 hostname is supported, but this name will be resolved during
3742 start-up.
3743
3744 <ports> is an optional port specification. If set, all connections will
3745 be sent to this port. If unset, the same port the client
3746 connected to will be used. The port may also be prefixed by a "+"
3747 or a "-". In this case, the server's port will be determined by
3748 adding this value to the client's port.
3749
3750 <param*> is a list of parameters for this server. The "server" keywords
3751 accepts an important number of options and has a complete section
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003752 dedicated to it. Please refer to section 5 for more details.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003753
3754 Examples :
3755 server first 10.1.1.1:1080 cookie first check inter 1000
3756 server second 10.1.1.2:1080 cookie second check inter 1000
3757
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003758 See also : section 5 about server options
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003759
3760
3761source <addr>[:<port>] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01003762source <addr>[:<port>] [interface <name>]
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003763 Set the source address for outgoing connections
3764 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3765 yes | no | yes | yes
3766 Arguments :
3767 <addr> is the IPv4 address HAProxy will bind to before connecting to a
3768 server. This address is also used as a source for health checks.
3769 The default value of 0.0.0.0 means that the system will select
3770 the most appropriate address to reach its destination.
3771
3772 <port> is an optional port. It is normally not needed but may be useful
3773 in some very specific contexts. The default value of zero means
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02003774 the system will select a free port. Note that port ranges are not
3775 supported in the backend. If you want to force port ranges, you
3776 have to specify them on each "server" line.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003777
3778 <addr2> is the IP address to present to the server when connections are
3779 forwarded in full transparent proxy mode. This is currently only
3780 supported on some patched Linux kernels. When this address is
3781 specified, clients connecting to the server will be presented
3782 with this address, while health checks will still use the address
3783 <addr>.
3784
3785 <port2> is the optional port to present to the server when connections
3786 are forwarded in full transparent proxy mode (see <addr2> above).
3787 The default value of zero means the system will select a free
3788 port.
3789
Willy Tarreaud53f96b2009-02-04 18:46:54 +01003790 <name> is an optional interface name to which to bind to for outgoing
3791 traffic. On systems supporting this features (currently, only
3792 Linux), this allows one to bind all traffic to the server to
3793 this interface even if it is not the one the system would select
3794 based on routing tables. This should be used with extreme care.
3795 Note that using this option requires root privileges.
3796
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003797 The "source" keyword is useful in complex environments where a specific
3798 address only is allowed to connect to the servers. It may be needed when a
3799 private address must be used through a public gateway for instance, and it is
3800 known that the system cannot determine the adequate source address by itself.
3801
3802 An extension which is available on certain patched Linux kernels may be used
3803 through the "usesrc" optional keyword. It makes it possible to connect to the
3804 servers with an IP address which does not belong to the system itself. This
3805 is called "full transparent proxy mode". For this to work, the destination
3806 servers have to route their traffic back to this address through the machine
3807 running HAProxy, and IP forwarding must generally be enabled on this machine.
3808
3809 In this "full transparent proxy" mode, it is possible to force a specific IP
3810 address to be presented to the servers. This is not much used in fact. A more
3811 common use is to tell HAProxy to present the client's IP address. For this,
3812 there are two methods :
3813
3814 - present the client's IP and port addresses. This is the most transparent
3815 mode, but it can cause problems when IP connection tracking is enabled on
3816 the machine, because a same connection may be seen twice with different
3817 states. However, this solution presents the huge advantage of not
3818 limiting the system to the 64k outgoing address+port couples, because all
3819 of the client ranges may be used.
3820
3821 - present only the client's IP address and select a spare port. This
3822 solution is still quite elegant but slightly less transparent (downstream
3823 firewalls logs will not match upstream's). It also presents the downside
3824 of limiting the number of concurrent connections to the usual 64k ports.
3825 However, since the upstream and downstream ports are different, local IP
3826 connection tracking on the machine will not be upset by the reuse of the
3827 same session.
3828
3829 Note that depending on the transparent proxy technology used, it may be
3830 required to force the source address. In fact, cttproxy version 2 requires an
3831 IP address in <addr> above, and does not support setting of "0.0.0.0" as the
3832 IP address because it creates NAT entries which much match the exact outgoing
3833 address. Tproxy version 4 and some other kernel patches which work in pure
3834 forwarding mode generally will not have this limitation.
3835
3836 This option sets the default source for all servers in the backend. It may
3837 also be specified in a "defaults" section. Finer source address specification
3838 is possible at the server level using the "source" server option. Refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003839 section 5 for more information.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003840
3841 Examples :
3842 backend private
3843 # Connect to the servers using our 192.168.1.200 source address
3844 source 192.168.1.200
3845
3846 backend transparent_ssl1
3847 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address
3848 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
3849
3850 backend transparent_ssl2
3851 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address and port
3852 # not recommended if IP conntrack is present on the local machine.
3853 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc client
3854
3855 backend transparent_ssl3
3856 # Connect to the SSL farm from the client's source address. It
3857 # is more conntrack-friendly.
3858 source 192.168.1.200 usesrc clientip
3859
3860 backend transparent_smtp
3861 # Connect to the SMTP farm from the client's source address/port
3862 # with Tproxy version 4.
3863 source 0.0.0.0 usesrc clientip
3864
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02003865 See also : the "source" server option in section 5, the Tproxy patches for
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003866 the Linux kernel on www.balabit.com, the "bind" keyword.
3867
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki25b501a2008-01-06 16:36:16 +01003868
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003869srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
3870 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
3871 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3872 yes | no | yes | yes
3873 Arguments :
3874 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
3875 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
3876 as explained at the top of this document.
3877
3878 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
3879 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
3880 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
3881 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
3882 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
3883 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
3884 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
3885
3886 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
3887 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
3888 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
3889 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
3890 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01003891 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01003892 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
3893 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
3894
3895 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
3896 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
3897 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
3898 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
3899 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
3900 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
3901
3902 This parameter is provided for compatibility but is currently deprecated.
3903 Please use "timeout server" instead.
3904
3905 See also : "timeout server", "timeout client" and "clitimeout".
3906
3907
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01003908stats auth <user>:<passwd>
3909 Enable statistics with authentication and grant access to an account
3910 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3911 yes | no | yes | yes
3912 Arguments :
3913 <user> is a user name to grant access to
3914
3915 <passwd> is the cleartext password associated to this user
3916
3917 This statement enables statistics with default settings, and restricts access
3918 to declared users only. It may be repeated as many times as necessary to
3919 allow as many users as desired. When a user tries to access the statistics
3920 without a valid account, a "401 Forbidden" response will be returned so that
3921 the browser asks the user to provide a valid user and password. The real
3922 which will be returned to the browser is configurable using "stats realm".
3923
3924 Since the authentication method is HTTP Basic Authentication, the passwords
3925 circulate in cleartext on the network. Thus, it was decided that the
3926 configuration file would also use cleartext passwords to remind the users
3927 that those ones should not be sensible and not shared with any other account.
3928
3929 It is also possible to reduce the scope of the proxies which appear in the
3930 report using "stats scope".
3931
3932 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
3933 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
3934 unobvious parameters.
3935
3936 Example :
3937 # public access (limited to this backend only)
3938 backend public_www
3939 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
3940 stats enable
3941 stats hide-version
3942 stats scope .
3943 stats uri /admin?stats
3944 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
3945 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
3946 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
3947
3948 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
3949 backend private_monitoring
3950 stats enable
3951 stats uri /admin?stats
3952 stats refresh 5s
3953
3954 See also : "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats scope", "stats uri"
3955
3956
3957stats enable
3958 Enable statistics reporting with default settings
3959 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3960 yes | no | yes | yes
3961 Arguments : none
3962
3963 This statement enables statistics reporting with default settings defined
3964 at build time. Unless stated otherwise, these settings are used :
3965 - stats uri : /haproxy?stats
3966 - stats realm : "HAProxy Statistics"
3967 - stats auth : no authentication
3968 - stats scope : no restriction
3969
3970 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
3971 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
3972 unobvious parameters.
3973
3974 Example :
3975 # public access (limited to this backend only)
3976 backend public_www
3977 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
3978 stats enable
3979 stats hide-version
3980 stats scope .
3981 stats uri /admin?stats
3982 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
3983 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
3984 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
3985
3986 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
3987 backend private_monitoring
3988 stats enable
3989 stats uri /admin?stats
3990 stats refresh 5s
3991
3992 See also : "stats auth", "stats realm", "stats uri"
3993
3994
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02003995stats show-node [ <name> ]
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02003996 Enable reporting of a host name on the statistics page.
3997 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
3998 yes | no | yes | yes
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02003999 Arguments:
4000 <name> is an optional name to be reported. If unspecified, the
4001 node name from global section is automatically used instead.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004002
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004003 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4004 customers, where node or description might be different on a stats page
4005 provided for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004006
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004007 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4008 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4009 unobvious parameters.
4010
4011 Example:
4012 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4013 backend private_monitoring
4014 stats enable
4015 stats show-node Europe-1
4016 stats uri /admin?stats
4017 stats refresh 5s
4018
4019 See also: "show-desc", "stats enable", "stats uri", and "node" in global section.
4020
4021
4022stats show-desc [ <description> ]
4023 Enable reporting of a description on the statistics page.
4024 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4025 yes | no | yes | yes
4026
4027 <name> is an optional description to be reported. If unspecified, the
4028 description from global section is automatically used instead.
4029
4030 This statement is useful for users that offer shared services to their
4031 customers, where node or description should be different for each customer.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004032
4033 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4034 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4035 unobvious parameters.
4036
4037 Example :
4038 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4039 backend private_monitoring
4040 stats enable
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004041 stats show-desc Master node for Europe, Asia, Africa
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004042 stats uri /admin?stats
4043 stats refresh 5s
4044
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki48cb2ae2009-10-02 22:51:14 +02004045 See also: "show-node", "stats enable", "stats uri" and "description" in global section.
Willy Tarreau1d45b7c2009-08-16 10:29:18 +02004046
4047
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004048stats realm <realm>
4049 Enable statistics and set authentication realm
4050 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4051 yes | no | yes | yes
4052 Arguments :
4053 <realm> is the name of the HTTP Basic Authentication realm reported to
4054 the browser. The browser uses it to display it in the pop-up
4055 inviting the user to enter a valid username and password.
4056
4057 The realm is read as a single word, so any spaces in it should be escaped
4058 using a backslash ('\').
4059
4060 This statement is useful only in conjunction with "stats auth" since it is
4061 only related to authentication.
4062
4063 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4064 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4065 unobvious parameters.
4066
4067 Example :
4068 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4069 backend public_www
4070 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4071 stats enable
4072 stats hide-version
4073 stats scope .
4074 stats uri /admin?stats
4075 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4076 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4077 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4078
4079 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4080 backend private_monitoring
4081 stats enable
4082 stats uri /admin?stats
4083 stats refresh 5s
4084
4085 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats uri"
4086
4087
4088stats refresh <delay>
4089 Enable statistics with automatic refresh
4090 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4091 yes | no | yes | yes
4092 Arguments :
4093 <delay> is the suggested refresh delay, specified in seconds, which will
4094 be returned to the browser consulting the report page. While the
4095 browser is free to apply any delay, it will generally respect it
4096 and refresh the page this every seconds. The refresh interval may
4097 be specified in any other non-default time unit, by suffixing the
4098 unit after the value, as explained at the top of this document.
4099
4100 This statement is useful on monitoring displays with a permanent page
4101 reporting the load balancer's activity. When set, the HTML report page will
4102 include a link "refresh"/"stop refresh" so that the user can select whether
4103 he wants automatic refresh of the page or not.
4104
4105 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4106 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4107 unobvious parameters.
4108
4109 Example :
4110 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4111 backend public_www
4112 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4113 stats enable
4114 stats hide-version
4115 stats scope .
4116 stats uri /admin?stats
4117 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4118 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4119 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4120
4121 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4122 backend private_monitoring
4123 stats enable
4124 stats uri /admin?stats
4125 stats refresh 5s
4126
4127 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4128
4129
4130stats scope { <name> | "." }
4131 Enable statistics and limit access scope
4132 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4133 yes | no | yes | yes
4134 Arguments :
4135 <name> is the name of a listen, frontend or backend section to be
4136 reported. The special name "." (a single dot) designates the
4137 section in which the statement appears.
4138
4139 When this statement is specified, only the sections enumerated with this
4140 statement will appear in the report. All other ones will be hidden. This
4141 statement may appear as many times as needed if multiple sections need to be
4142 reported. Please note that the name checking is performed as simple string
4143 comparisons, and that it is never checked that a give section name really
4144 exists.
4145
4146 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4147 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4148 unobvious parameters.
4149
4150 Example :
4151 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4152 backend public_www
4153 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4154 stats enable
4155 stats hide-version
4156 stats scope .
4157 stats uri /admin?stats
4158 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4159 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4160 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4161
4162 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4163 backend private_monitoring
4164 stats enable
4165 stats uri /admin?stats
4166 stats refresh 5s
4167
4168 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4169
4170
4171stats uri <prefix>
4172 Enable statistics and define the URI prefix to access them
4173 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4174 yes | no | yes | yes
4175 Arguments :
4176 <prefix> is the prefix of any URI which will be redirected to stats. This
4177 prefix may contain a question mark ('?') to indicate part of a
4178 query string.
4179
4180 The statistics URI is intercepted on the relayed traffic, so it appears as a
4181 page within the normal application. It is strongly advised to ensure that the
4182 selected URI will never appear in the application, otherwise it will never be
4183 possible to reach it in the application.
4184
4185 The default URI compiled in haproxy is "/haproxy?stats", but this may be
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004186 changed at build time, so it's better to always explicitly specify it here.
Willy Tarreaueabeafa2008-01-16 16:17:06 +01004187 It is generally a good idea to include a question mark in the URI so that
4188 intermediate proxies refrain from caching the results. Also, since any string
4189 beginning with the prefix will be accepted as a stats request, the question
4190 mark helps ensuring that no valid URI will begin with the same words.
4191
4192 It is sometimes very convenient to use "/" as the URI prefix, and put that
4193 statement in a "listen" instance of its own. That makes it easy to dedicate
4194 an address or a port to statistics only.
4195
4196 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4197 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4198 unobvious parameters.
4199
4200 Example :
4201 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4202 backend public_www
4203 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4204 stats enable
4205 stats hide-version
4206 stats scope .
4207 stats uri /admin?stats
4208 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4209 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4210 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4211
4212 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4213 backend private_monitoring
4214 stats enable
4215 stats uri /admin?stats
4216 stats refresh 5s
4217
4218 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm"
4219
4220
4221stats hide-version
4222 Enable statistics and hide HAProxy version reporting
4223 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4224 yes | no | yes | yes
4225 Arguments : none
4226
4227 By default, the stats page reports some useful status information along with
4228 the statistics. Among them is HAProxy's version. However, it is generally
4229 considered dangerous to report precise version to anyone, as it can help them
4230 target known weaknesses with specific attacks. The "stats hide-version"
4231 statement removes the version from the statistics report. This is recommended
4232 for public sites or any site with a weak login/password.
4233
4234 Though this statement alone is enough to enable statistics reporting, it is
4235 recommended to set all other settings in order to avoid relying on default
4236 unobvious parameters.
4237
4238 Example :
4239 # public access (limited to this backend only)
4240 backend public_www
4241 server srv1 192.168.0.1:80
4242 stats enable
4243 stats hide-version
4244 stats scope .
4245 stats uri /admin?stats
4246 stats realm Haproxy\ Statistics
4247 stats auth admin1:AdMiN123
4248 stats auth admin2:AdMiN321
4249
4250 # internal monitoring access (unlimited)
4251 backend private_monitoring
4252 stats enable
4253 stats uri /admin?stats
4254 stats refresh 5s
4255
4256 See also : "stats auth", "stats enable", "stats realm", "stats uri"
4257
4258
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004259tcp-request content accept [{if | unless} <condition>]
4260 Accept a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4261 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4262 no | yes | yes | no
4263
4264 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately validated if the
4265 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4266 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4267 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4268 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4269 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4270 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4271 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4272
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004273 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004274 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4275
4276 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action already is
4277 "accept". Thus, this statement alone does not bring anything without another
4278 "reject" statement.
4279
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004280 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004281
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004282 See also : "tcp-request content reject", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004283
4284
4285tcp-request content reject [{if | unless} <condition>]
4286 Reject a connection if/unless a content inspection condition is matched
4287 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4288 no | yes | yes | no
4289
4290 During TCP content inspection, the connection is immediately rejected if the
4291 condition is true (when used with "if") or false (when used with "unless").
4292 Most of the time during content inspection, a condition will be in an
4293 uncertain state which is neither true nor false. The evaluation immediately
4294 stops when such a condition is encountered. It is important to understand
4295 that "accept" and "reject" rules are evaluated in their exact declaration
4296 order, so that it is possible to build complex rules from them. There is no
4297 specific limit to the number of rules which may be inserted.
4298
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004299 Note that the "if/unless" condition is optional. If no condition is set on
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004300 the action, it is simply performed unconditionally.
4301
4302 If no "tcp-request content" rules are matched, the default action is set to
4303 "accept".
4304
4305 Example:
4306 # reject SMTP connection if client speaks first
4307 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4308 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4309 tcp-request reject if content_present
4310
4311 # Forward HTTPS connection only if client speaks
4312 tcp-request inspect-delay 30s
4313 acl content_present req_len gt 0
4314 tcp-request accept if content_present
4315 tcp-request reject
4316
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004317 See section 7 about ACL usage.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004318
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004319 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request inspect-delay"
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004320
4321
4322tcp-request inspect-delay <timeout>
4323 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for data during content inspection
4324 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4325 no | yes | yes | no
4326 Arguments :
4327 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4328 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4329 as explained at the top of this document.
4330
4331 People using haproxy primarily as a TCP relay are often worried about the
4332 risk of passing any type of protocol to a server without any analysis. In
4333 order to be able to analyze the request contents, we must first withhold
4334 the data then analyze them. This statement simply enables withholding of
4335 data for at most the specified amount of time.
4336
4337 Note that when performing content inspection, haproxy will evaluate the whole
4338 rules for every new chunk which gets in, taking into account the fact that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004339 those data are partial. If no rule matches before the aforementioned delay,
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004340 a last check is performed upon expiration, this time considering that the
Willy Tarreaud869b242009-03-15 14:43:58 +01004341 contents are definitive. If no delay is set, haproxy will not wait at all
4342 and will immediately apply a verdict based on the available information.
4343 Obviously this is unlikely to be very useful and might even be racy, so such
4344 setups are not recommended.
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004345
4346 As soon as a rule matches, the request is released and continues as usual. If
4347 the timeout is reached and no rule matches, the default policy will be to let
4348 it pass through unaffected.
4349
4350 For most protocols, it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients
4351 send the full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to
4352 cover TCP retransmits but that's all. For some protocols, it may make sense
4353 to use large values, for instance to ensure that the client never talks
4354 before the server (eg: SMTP), or to wait for a client to talk before passing
4355 data to the server (eg: SSL). Note that the client timeout must cover at
4356 least the inspection delay, otherwise it will expire first.
4357
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02004358 See also : "tcp-request content accept", "tcp-request content reject",
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02004359 "timeout client".
4360
4361
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004362timeout check <timeout>
4363 Set additional check timeout, but only after a connection has been already
4364 established.
4365
4366 May be used in sections: defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4367 yes | no | yes | yes
4368 Arguments:
4369 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4370 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4371 as explained at the top of this document.
4372
4373 If set, haproxy uses min("timeout connect", "inter") as a connect timeout
4374 for check and "timeout check" as an additional read timeout. The "min" is
4375 used so that people running with *very* long "timeout connect" (eg. those
4376 who needed this due to the queue or tarpit) do not slow down their checks.
4377 Of course it is better to use "check queue" and "check tarpit" instead of
4378 long "timeout connect".
4379
4380 If "timeout check" is not set haproxy uses "inter" for complete check
4381 timeout (connect + read) exactly like all <1.3.15 version.
4382
4383 In most cases check request is much simpler and faster to handle than normal
4384 requests and people may want to kick out laggy servers so this timeout should
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01004385 be smaller than "timeout server".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004386
4387 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4388 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4389 forget about it.
4390
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01004391 See also: "timeout connect", "timeout queue", "timeout server",
4392 "timeout tarpit".
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004393
4394
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004395timeout client <timeout>
4396timeout clitimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4397 Set the maximum inactivity time on the client side.
4398 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4399 yes | yes | yes | no
4400 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004401 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004402 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4403 as explained at the top of this document.
4404
4405 The inactivity timeout applies when the client is expected to acknowledge or
4406 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4407 during the first phase, when the client sends the request, and during the
4408 response while it is reading data sent by the server. The value is specified
4409 in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other unit if the number is
4410 suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this document. In TCP mode
4411 (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly recommended that the
4412 client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in order to avoid complex
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004413 situations to debug. It is a good practice to cover one or several TCP packet
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004414 losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3 seconds
4415 (eg: 4 or 5 seconds).
4416
4417 This parameter is specific to frontends, but can be specified once for all in
4418 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4419 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4420 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4421 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4422 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4423
4424 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "clitimeout". It is recommended
4425 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout clitimeout" is
4426 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
4427
4428 See also : "clitimeout", "timeout server".
4429
4430
4431timeout connect <timeout>
4432timeout contimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4433 Set the maximum time to wait for a connection attempt to a server to succeed.
4434 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4435 yes | no | yes | yes
4436 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004437 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004438 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4439 as explained at the top of this document.
4440
4441 If the server is located on the same LAN as haproxy, the connection should be
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004442 immediate (less than a few milliseconds). Anyway, it is a good practice to
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004443 cover one or several TCP packet losses by specifying timeouts that are
4444 slightly above multiples of 3 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds). By default, the
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki5259dfe2008-01-21 01:54:06 +01004445 connect timeout also presets both queue and tarpit timeouts to the same value
4446 if these have not been specified.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004447
4448 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4449 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4450 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4451 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4452 during startup because it may results in accumulation of failed sessions in
4453 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4454
4455 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "contimeout". It is recommended
4456 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout contimeout" is
4457 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
4458
Willy Tarreau41a340d2008-01-22 12:25:31 +01004459 See also: "timeout check", "timeout queue", "timeout server", "contimeout",
4460 "timeout tarpit".
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004461
4462
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01004463timeout http-request <timeout>
4464 Set the maximum allowed time to wait for a complete HTTP request
4465 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02004466 yes | yes | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01004467 Arguments :
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004468 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01004469 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4470 as explained at the top of this document.
4471
4472 In order to offer DoS protection, it may be required to lower the maximum
4473 accepted time to receive a complete HTTP request without affecting the client
4474 timeout. This helps protecting against established connections on which
4475 nothing is sent. The client timeout cannot offer a good protection against
4476 this abuse because it is an inactivity timeout, which means that if the
4477 attacker sends one character every now and then, the timeout will not
4478 trigger. With the HTTP request timeout, no matter what speed the client
4479 types, the request will be aborted if it does not complete in time.
4480
4481 Note that this timeout only applies to the header part of the request, and
4482 not to any data. As soon as the empty line is received, this timeout is not
4483 used anymore.
4484
4485 Generally it is enough to set it to a few seconds, as most clients send the
4486 full request immediately upon connection. Add 3 or more seconds to cover TCP
4487 retransmits but that's all. Setting it to very low values (eg: 50 ms) will
4488 generally work on local networks as long as there are no packet losses. This
4489 will prevent people from sending bare HTTP requests using telnet.
4490
4491 If this parameter is not set, the client timeout still applies between each
Willy Tarreaucd7afc02009-07-12 10:03:17 +02004492 chunk of the incoming request. It should be set in the frontend to take
4493 effect, unless the frontend is in TCP mode, in which case the HTTP backend's
4494 timeout will be used.
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01004495
4496 See also : "timeout client".
4497
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004498
4499timeout queue <timeout>
4500 Set the maximum time to wait in the queue for a connection slot to be free
4501 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4502 yes | no | yes | yes
4503 Arguments :
4504 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4505 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4506 as explained at the top of this document.
4507
4508 When a server's maxconn is reached, connections are left pending in a queue
4509 which may be server-specific or global to the backend. In order not to wait
4510 indefinitely, a timeout is applied to requests pending in the queue. If the
4511 timeout is reached, it is considered that the request will almost never be
4512 served, so it is dropped and a 503 error is returned to the client.
4513
4514 The "timeout queue" statement allows to fix the maximum time for a request to
4515 be left pending in a queue. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's
4516 connection timeout ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility
4517 with older versions with no "timeout queue" parameter.
4518
4519 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
4520
4521
4522timeout server <timeout>
4523timeout srvtimeout <timeout> (deprecated)
4524 Set the maximum inactivity time on the server side.
4525 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4526 yes | no | yes | yes
4527 Arguments :
4528 <timeout> is the timeout value specified in milliseconds by default, but
4529 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4530 as explained at the top of this document.
4531
4532 The inactivity timeout applies when the server is expected to acknowledge or
4533 send data. In HTTP mode, this timeout is particularly important to consider
4534 during the first phase of the server's response, when it has to send the
4535 headers, as it directly represents the server's processing time for the
4536 request. To find out what value to put there, it's often good to start with
4537 what would be considered as unacceptable response times, then check the logs
4538 to observe the response time distribution, and adjust the value accordingly.
4539
4540 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4541 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4542 document. In TCP mode (and to a lesser extent, in HTTP mode), it is highly
4543 recommended that the client timeout remains equal to the server timeout in
4544 order to avoid complex situations to debug. Whatever the expected server
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01004545 response times, it is a good practice to cover at least one or several TCP
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004546 packet losses by specifying timeouts that are slightly above multiples of 3
4547 seconds (eg: 4 or 5 seconds minimum).
4548
4549 This parameter is specific to backends, but can be specified once for all in
4550 "defaults" sections. This is in fact one of the easiest solutions not to
4551 forget about it. An unspecified timeout results in an infinite timeout, which
4552 is not recommended. Such a usage is accepted and works but reports a warning
4553 during startup because it may results in accumulation of expired sessions in
4554 the system if the system's timeouts are not configured either.
4555
4556 This parameter replaces the old, deprecated "srvtimeout". It is recommended
4557 to use it to write new configurations. The form "timeout srvtimeout" is
4558 provided only by backwards compatibility but its use is strongly discouraged.
4559
4560 See also : "srvtimeout", "timeout client".
4561
4562
4563timeout tarpit <timeout>
4564 Set the duration for which tapitted connections will be maintained
4565 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4566 yes | yes | yes | yes
4567 Arguments :
4568 <timeout> is the tarpit duration specified in milliseconds by default, but
4569 can be in any other unit if the number is suffixed by the unit,
4570 as explained at the top of this document.
4571
4572 When a connection is tarpitted using "reqtarpit", it is maintained open with
4573 no activity for a certain amount of time, then closed. "timeout tarpit"
4574 defines how long it will be maintained open.
4575
4576 The value is specified in milliseconds by default, but can be in any other
4577 unit if the number is suffixed by the unit, as specified at the top of this
4578 document. If unspecified, the same value as the backend's connection timeout
4579 ("timeout connect") is used, for backwards compatibility with older versions
4580 with no "timeout tapit" parameter.
4581
4582 See also : "timeout connect", "contimeout".
4583
4584
4585transparent (deprecated)
4586 Enable client-side transparent proxying
4587 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
Willy Tarreau4b1f8592008-12-23 23:13:55 +01004588 yes | no | yes | yes
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004589 Arguments : none
4590
4591 This keyword was introduced in order to provide layer 7 persistence to layer
4592 3 load balancers. The idea is to use the OS's ability to redirect an incoming
4593 connection for a remote address to a local process (here HAProxy), and let
4594 this process know what address was initially requested. When this option is
4595 used, sessions without cookies will be forwarded to the original destination
4596 IP address of the incoming request (which should match that of another
4597 equipment), while requests with cookies will still be forwarded to the
4598 appropriate server.
4599
4600 The "transparent" keyword is deprecated, use "option transparent" instead.
4601
4602 Note that contrary to a common belief, this option does NOT make HAProxy
4603 present the client's IP to the server when establishing the connection.
4604
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004605 See also: "option transparent"
4606
4607
4608use_backend <backend> if <condition>
4609use_backend <backend> unless <condition>
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02004610 Switch to a specific backend if/unless an ACL-based condition is matched.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004611 May be used in sections : defaults | frontend | listen | backend
4612 no | yes | yes | no
4613 Arguments :
4614 <backend> is the name of a valid backend or "listen" section.
4615
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004616 <condition> is a condition composed of ACLs, as described in section 7.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004617
4618 When doing content-switching, connections arrive on a frontend and are then
4619 dispatched to various backends depending on a number of conditions. The
4620 relation between the conditions and the backends is described with the
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02004621 "use_backend" keyword. While it is normally used with HTTP processing, it can
4622 also be used in pure TCP, either without content using stateless ACLs (eg:
4623 source address validation) or combined with a "tcp-request" rule to wait for
4624 some payload.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004625
4626 There may be as many "use_backend" rules as desired. All of these rules are
4627 evaluated in their declaration order, and the first one which matches will
4628 assign the backend.
4629
4630 In the first form, the backend will be used if the condition is met. In the
4631 second form, the backend will be used if the condition is not met. If no
4632 condition is valid, the backend defined with "default_backend" will be used.
4633 If no default backend is defined, either the servers in the same section are
4634 used (in case of a "listen" section) or, in case of a frontend, no server is
4635 used and a 503 service unavailable response is returned.
4636
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02004637 Note that it is possible to switch from a TCP frontend to an HTTP backend. In
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004638 this case, either the frontend has already checked that the protocol is HTTP,
Willy Tarreau51aecc72009-07-12 09:47:04 +02004639 and backend processing will immediately follow, or the backend will wait for
4640 a complete HTTP request to get in. This feature is useful when a frontend
4641 must decode several protocols on a unique port, one of them being HTTP.
4642
Willy Tarreau1d0dfb12009-07-07 15:10:31 +02004643 See also: "default_backend", "tcp-request", and section 7 about ACLs.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01004644
Willy Tarreau036fae02008-01-06 13:24:40 +01004645
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020046465. Server options
4647-----------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02004648
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004649The "server" keyword supports a certain number of settings which are all passed
4650as arguments on the server line. The order in which those arguments appear does
4651not count, and they are all optional. Some of those settings are single words
4652(booleans) while others expect one or several values after them. In this case,
4653the values must immediately follow the setting name. All those settings must be
4654specified after the server's address if they are used :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02004655
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004656 server <name> <address>[:port] [settings ...]
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02004657
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004658The currently supported settings are the following ones.
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01004659
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004660addr <ipv4>
4661 Using the "addr" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different IP address
4662 to send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate an IP
4663 address to specific component able to perform complex tests which are more
4664 suitable to health-checks than the application. This parameter is ignored if
4665 the "check" parameter is not set. See also the "port" parameter.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02004666
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004667backup
4668 When "backup" is present on a server line, the server is only used in load
4669 balancing when all other non-backup servers are unavailable. Requests coming
4670 with a persistence cookie referencing the server will always be served
4671 though. By default, only the first operational backup server is used, unless
4672 the "allbackups" option is set in the backend. See also the "allbackups"
4673 option.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02004674
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004675check
4676 This option enables health checks on the server. By default, a server is
4677 always considered available. If "check" is set, the server will receive
4678 periodic health checks to ensure that it is really able to serve requests.
4679 The default address and port to send the tests to are those of the server,
4680 and the default source is the same as the one defined in the backend. It is
4681 possible to change the address using the "addr" parameter, the port using the
4682 "port" parameter, the source address using the "source" address, and the
4683 interval and timers using the "inter", "rise" and "fall" parameters. The
4684 request method is define in the backend using the "httpchk", "smtpchk",
4685 and "ssl-hello-chk" options. Please refer to those options and parameters for
4686 more information.
4687
4688cookie <value>
4689 The "cookie" parameter sets the cookie value assigned to the server to
4690 <value>. This value will be checked in incoming requests, and the first
4691 operational server possessing the same value will be selected. In return, in
4692 cookie insertion or rewrite modes, this value will be assigned to the cookie
4693 sent to the client. There is nothing wrong in having several servers sharing
4694 the same cookie value, and it is in fact somewhat common between normal and
4695 backup servers. See also the "cookie" keyword in backend section.
4696
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01004697error-limit <count>
4698 If health observing is enabled, the "error-limit" parameter specifies the number
4699 of consecutive errors that triggers event selected by the "on-error" option.
4700 By default it is set to 10 consecutive errors.
4701
4702 See also the "check", "error-limit" and "on-error".
4703
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004704fall <count>
4705 The "fall" parameter states that a server will be considered as dead after
4706 <count> consecutive unsuccessful health checks. This value defaults to 3 if
4707 unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "rise" parameters.
4708
4709id <value>
Willy Tarreau53fb4ae2009-10-04 23:04:08 +02004710 Set a persistent ID for the server. This ID must be positive and unique for
4711 the proxy. An unused ID will automatically be assigned if unset. The first
4712 assigned value will be 1. This ID is currently only returned in statistics.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004713
4714inter <delay>
4715fastinter <delay>
4716downinter <delay>
4717 The "inter" parameter sets the interval between two consecutive health checks
4718 to <delay> milliseconds. If left unspecified, the delay defaults to 2000 ms.
4719 It is also possible to use "fastinter" and "downinter" to optimize delays
4720 between checks depending on the server state :
4721
4722 Server state | Interval used
4723 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
4724 UP 100% (non-transitional) | "inter"
4725 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
4726 Transitionally UP (going down), |
4727 Transitionally DOWN (going up), | "fastinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
4728 or yet unchecked. |
4729 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
4730 DOWN 100% (non-transitional) | "downinter" if set, "inter" otherwise.
4731 ---------------------------------+-----------------------------------------
4732
4733 Just as with every other time-based parameter, they can be entered in any
4734 other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The "inter" parameter also
4735 serves as a timeout for health checks sent to servers if "timeout check" is
4736 not set. In order to reduce "resonance" effects when multiple servers are
4737 hosted on the same hardware, the health-checks of all servers are started
4738 with a small time offset between them. It is also possible to add some random
4739 noise in the health checks interval using the global "spread-checks"
4740 keyword. This makes sense for instance when a lot of backends use the same
4741 servers.
4742
4743maxconn <maxconn>
4744 The "maxconn" parameter specifies the maximal number of concurrent
4745 connections that will be sent to this server. If the number of incoming
4746 concurrent requests goes higher than this value, they will be queued, waiting
4747 for a connection to be released. This parameter is very important as it can
4748 save fragile servers from going down under extreme loads. If a "minconn"
4749 parameter is specified, the limit becomes dynamic. The default value is "0"
4750 which means unlimited. See also the "minconn" and "maxqueue" parameters, and
4751 the backend's "fullconn" keyword.
4752
4753maxqueue <maxqueue>
4754 The "maxqueue" parameter specifies the maximal number of connections which
4755 will wait in the queue for this server. If this limit is reached, next
4756 requests will be redispatched to other servers instead of indefinitely
4757 waiting to be served. This will break persistence but may allow people to
4758 quickly re-log in when the server they try to connect to is dying. The
4759 default value is "0" which means the queue is unlimited. See also the
4760 "maxconn" and "minconn" parameters.
4761
4762minconn <minconn>
4763 When the "minconn" parameter is set, the maxconn limit becomes a dynamic
4764 limit following the backend's load. The server will always accept at least
4765 <minconn> connections, never more than <maxconn>, and the limit will be on
4766 the ramp between both values when the backend has less than <fullconn>
4767 concurrent connections. This makes it possible to limit the load on the
4768 server during normal loads, but push it further for important loads without
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004769 overloading the server during exceptional loads. See also the "maxconn"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004770 and "maxqueue" parameters, as well as the "fullconn" backend keyword.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki97f07b82009-12-15 22:31:24 +01004771
4772observe <mode>
4773 This option enables health adjusting based on observing communication with
4774 the server. By default this functionality is disabled and enabling it also
4775 requires to enable health checks. There are two supported modes: "layer4" and
4776 "layer7". In layer4 mode, only successful/unsuccessful tcp connections are
4777 significant. In layer7, which is only allowed for http proxies, responses
4778 received from server are verified, like valid/wrong http code, unparsable
4779 headers, a timeout, etc.
4780
4781 See also the "check", "on-error" and "error-limit".
4782
4783on-error <mode>
4784 Select what should happen when enough consecutive errors are detected.
4785 Currently, four modes are available:
4786 - fastinter: force fastinter
4787 - fail-check: simulate a failed check, also forces fastinter (default)
4788 - sudden-death: simulate a pre-fatal failed health check, one more failed
4789 check will mark a server down, forces fastinter
4790 - mark-down: mark the server immediately down and force fastinter
4791
4792 See also the "check", "observe" and "error-limit".
4793
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004794port <port>
4795 Using the "port" parameter, it becomes possible to use a different port to
4796 send health-checks. On some servers, it may be desirable to dedicate a port
4797 to a specific component able to perform complex tests which are more suitable
4798 to health-checks than the application. It is common to run a simple script in
4799 inetd for instance. This parameter is ignored if the "check" parameter is not
4800 set. See also the "addr" parameter.
4801
4802redir <prefix>
4803 The "redir" parameter enables the redirection mode for all GET and HEAD
4804 requests addressing this server. This means that instead of having HAProxy
4805 forward the request to the server, it will send an "HTTP 302" response with
4806 the "Location" header composed of this prefix immediately followed by the
4807 requested URI beginning at the leading '/' of the path component. That means
4808 that no trailing slash should be used after <prefix>. All invalid requests
4809 will be rejected, and all non-GET or HEAD requests will be normally served by
4810 the server. Note that since the response is completely forged, no header
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004811 mangling nor cookie insertion is possible in the response. However, cookies in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004812 requests are still analysed, making this solution completely usable to direct
4813 users to a remote location in case of local disaster. Main use consists in
4814 increasing bandwidth for static servers by having the clients directly
4815 connect to them. Note: never use a relative location here, it would cause a
4816 loop between the client and HAProxy!
4817
4818 Example : server srv1 192.168.1.1:80 redir http://image1.mydomain.com check
4819
4820rise <count>
4821 The "rise" parameter states that a server will be considered as operational
4822 after <count> consecutive successful health checks. This value defaults to 2
4823 if unspecified. See also the "check", "inter" and "fall" parameters.
4824
4825slowstart <start_time_in_ms>
4826 The "slowstart" parameter for a server accepts a value in milliseconds which
4827 indicates after how long a server which has just come back up will run at
4828 full speed. Just as with every other time-based parameter, it can be entered
4829 in any other explicit unit among { us, ms, s, m, h, d }. The speed grows
4830 linearly from 0 to 100% during this time. The limitation applies to two
4831 parameters :
4832
4833 - maxconn: the number of connections accepted by the server will grow from 1
4834 to 100% of the usual dynamic limit defined by (minconn,maxconn,fullconn).
4835
4836 - weight: when the backend uses a dynamic weighted algorithm, the weight
4837 grows linearly from 1 to 100%. In this case, the weight is updated at every
4838 health-check. For this reason, it is important that the "inter" parameter
4839 is smaller than the "slowstart", in order to maximize the number of steps.
4840
4841 The slowstart never applies when haproxy starts, otherwise it would cause
4842 trouble to running servers. It only applies when a server has been previously
4843 seen as failed.
4844
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004845source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [usesrc { <addr2>[:<port2>] | client | clientip } ]
4846source <addr>[:<pl>[-<ph>]] [interface <name>] ...
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004847 The "source" parameter sets the source address which will be used when
4848 connecting to the server. It follows the exact same parameters and principle
4849 as the backend "source" keyword, except that it only applies to the server
4850 referencing it. Please consult the "source" keyword for details.
4851
Willy Tarreauc6f4ce82009-06-10 11:09:37 +02004852 Additionally, the "source" statement on a server line allows one to specify a
4853 source port range by indicating the lower and higher bounds delimited by a
4854 dash ('-'). Some operating systems might require a valid IP address when a
4855 source port range is specified. It is permitted to have the same IP/range for
4856 several servers. Doing so makes it possible to bypass the maximum of 64k
4857 total concurrent connections. The limit will then reach 64k connections per
4858 server.
4859
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004860track [<proxy>/]<server>
4861 This option enables ability to set the current state of the server by
4862 tracking another one. Only a server with checks enabled can be tracked
4863 so it is not possible for example to track a server that tracks another
4864 one. If <proxy> is omitted the current one is used. If disable-on-404 is
4865 used, it has to be enabled on both proxies.
4866
4867weight <weight>
4868 The "weight" parameter is used to adjust the server's weight relative to
4869 other servers. All servers will receive a load proportional to their weight
4870 relative to the sum of all weights, so the higher the weight, the higher the
Willy Tarreau6704d672009-06-15 10:56:05 +02004871 load. The default weight is 1, and the maximal value is 256. A value of 0
4872 means the server will not participate in load-balancing but will still accept
4873 persistent connections. If this parameter is used to distribute the load
4874 according to server's capacity, it is recommended to start with values which
4875 can both grow and shrink, for instance between 10 and 100 to leave enough
4876 room above and below for later adjustments.
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004877
4878
48796. HTTP header manipulation
4880---------------------------
4881
4882In HTTP mode, it is possible to rewrite, add or delete some of the request and
4883response headers based on regular expressions. It is also possible to block a
4884request or a response if a particular header matches a regular expression,
4885which is enough to stop most elementary protocol attacks, and to protect
4886against information leak from the internal network. But there is a limitation
4887to this : since HAProxy's HTTP engine does not support keep-alive, only headers
4888passed during the first request of a TCP session will be seen. All subsequent
4889headers will be considered data only and not analyzed. Furthermore, HAProxy
4890never touches data contents, it stops analysis at the end of headers.
4891
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02004892There is an exception though. If HAProxy encounters an "Informational Response"
4893(status code 1xx), it is able to process all rsp* rules which can allow, deny,
4894rewrite or delete a header, but it will refuse to add a header to any such
4895messages as this is not HTTP-compliant. The reason for still processing headers
4896in such responses is to stop and/or fix any possible information leak which may
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004897happen, for instance because another downstream equipment would unconditionally
Willy Tarreau816b9792009-09-15 21:25:21 +02004898add a header, or if a server name appears there. When such messages are seen,
4899normal processing still occurs on the next non-informational messages.
4900
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004901This section covers common usage of the following keywords, described in detail
4902in section 4.2 :
4903
4904 - reqadd <string>
4905 - reqallow <search>
4906 - reqiallow <search>
4907 - reqdel <search>
4908 - reqidel <search>
4909 - reqdeny <search>
4910 - reqideny <search>
4911 - reqpass <search>
4912 - reqipass <search>
4913 - reqrep <search> <replace>
4914 - reqirep <search> <replace>
4915 - reqtarpit <search>
4916 - reqitarpit <search>
4917 - rspadd <string>
4918 - rspdel <search>
4919 - rspidel <search>
4920 - rspdeny <search>
4921 - rspideny <search>
4922 - rsprep <search> <replace>
4923 - rspirep <search> <replace>
4924
4925With all these keywords, the same conventions are used. The <search> parameter
4926is a POSIX extended regular expression (regex) which supports grouping through
4927parenthesis (without the backslash). Spaces and other delimiters must be
4928prefixed with a backslash ('\') to avoid confusion with a field delimiter.
4929Other characters may be prefixed with a backslash to change their meaning :
4930
4931 \t for a tab
4932 \r for a carriage return (CR)
4933 \n for a new line (LF)
4934 \ to mark a space and differentiate it from a delimiter
4935 \# to mark a sharp and differentiate it from a comment
4936 \\ to use a backslash in a regex
4937 \\\\ to use a backslash in the text (*2 for regex, *2 for haproxy)
4938 \xXX to write the ASCII hex code XX as in the C language
4939
4940The <replace> parameter contains the string to be used to replace the largest
4941portion of text matching the regex. It can make use of the special characters
4942above, and can reference a substring which is delimited by parenthesis in the
4943regex, by writing a backslash ('\') immediately followed by one digit from 0 to
49449 indicating the group position (0 designating the entire line). This practice
4945is very common to users of the "sed" program.
4946
4947The <string> parameter represents the string which will systematically be added
4948after the last header line. It can also use special character sequences above.
4949
4950Notes related to these keywords :
4951---------------------------------
4952 - these keywords are not always convenient to allow/deny based on header
4953 contents. It is strongly recommended to use ACLs with the "block" keyword
4954 instead, resulting in far more flexible and manageable rules.
4955
4956 - lines are always considered as a whole. It is not possible to reference
4957 a header name only or a value only. This is important because of the way
4958 headers are written (notably the number of spaces after the colon).
4959
4960 - the first line is always considered as a header, which makes it possible to
4961 rewrite or filter HTTP requests URIs or response codes, but in turn makes
4962 it harder to distinguish between headers and request line. The regex prefix
4963 ^[^\ \t]*[\ \t] matches any HTTP method followed by a space, and the prefix
4964 ^[^ \t:]*: matches any header name followed by a colon.
4965
4966 - for performances reasons, the number of characters added to a request or to
4967 a response is limited at build time to values between 1 and 4 kB. This
4968 should normally be far more than enough for most usages. If it is too short
4969 on occasional usages, it is possible to gain some space by removing some
4970 useless headers before adding new ones.
4971
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01004972 - keywords beginning with "reqi" and "rspi" are the same as their counterpart
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02004973 without the 'i' letter except that they ignore case when matching patterns.
4974
4975 - when a request passes through a frontend then a backend, all req* rules
4976 from the frontend will be evaluated, then all req* rules from the backend
4977 will be evaluated. The reverse path is applied to responses.
4978
4979 - req* statements are applied after "block" statements, so that "block" is
4980 always the first one, but before "use_backend" in order to permit rewriting
4981 before switching.
4982
4983
49847. Using ACLs
4985-------------
4986
4987The use of Access Control Lists (ACL) provides a flexible solution to perform
4988content switching and generally to take decisions based on content extracted
4989from the request, the response or any environmental status. The principle is
4990simple :
4991
4992 - define test criteria with sets of values
4993 - perform actions only if a set of tests is valid
4994
4995The actions generally consist in blocking the request, or selecting a backend.
4996
4997In order to define a test, the "acl" keyword is used. The syntax is :
4998
4999 acl <aclname> <criterion> [flags] [operator] <value> ...
5000
5001This creates a new ACL <aclname> or completes an existing one with new tests.
5002Those tests apply to the portion of request/response specified in <criterion>
5003and may be adjusted with optional flags [flags]. Some criteria also support
5004an operator which may be specified before the set of values. The values are
5005of the type supported by the criterion, and are separated by spaces.
5006
5007ACL names must be formed from upper and lower case letters, digits, '-' (dash),
5008'_' (underscore) , '.' (dot) and ':' (colon). ACL names are case-sensitive,
5009which means that "my_acl" and "My_Acl" are two different ACLs.
5010
5011There is no enforced limit to the number of ACLs. The unused ones do not affect
5012performance, they just consume a small amount of memory.
5013
5014The following ACL flags are currently supported :
5015
5016 -i : ignore case during matching.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005017 -- : force end of flags. Useful when a string looks like one of the flags.
5018
5019Supported types of values are :
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005020
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005021 - integers or integer ranges
5022 - strings
5023 - regular expressions
5024 - IP addresses and networks
5025
5026
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020050277.1. Matching integers
5028----------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005029
5030Matching integers is special in that ranges and operators are permitted. Note
5031that integer matching only applies to positive values. A range is a value
5032expressed with a lower and an upper bound separated with a colon, both of which
5033may be omitted.
5034
5035For instance, "1024:65535" is a valid range to represent a range of
5036unprivileged ports, and "1024:" would also work. "0:1023" is a valid
5037representation of privileged ports, and ":1023" would also work.
5038
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005039As a special case, some ACL functions support decimal numbers which are in fact
5040two integers separated by a dot. This is used with some version checks for
5041instance. All integer properties apply to those decimal numbers, including
5042ranges and operators.
5043
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005044For an easier usage, comparison operators are also supported. Note that using
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005045operators with ranges does not make much sense and is strongly discouraged.
5046Similarly, it does not make much sense to perform order comparisons with a set
5047of values.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005048
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005049Available operators for integer matching are :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005050
5051 eq : true if the tested value equals at least one value
5052 ge : true if the tested value is greater than or equal to at least one value
5053 gt : true if the tested value is greater than at least one value
5054 le : true if the tested value is less than or equal to at least one value
5055 lt : true if the tested value is less than at least one value
5056
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005057For instance, the following ACL matches any negative Content-Length header :
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005058
5059 acl negative-length hdr_val(content-length) lt 0
5060
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005061This one matches SSL versions between 3.0 and 3.1 (inclusive) :
5062
5063 acl sslv3 req_ssl_ver 3:3.1
5064
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005065
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020050667.2. Matching strings
5067---------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005068
5069String matching applies to verbatim strings as they are passed, with the
5070exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it possible to escape some
5071characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is passed before the first
5072string, then the matching will be performed ignoring the case. In order
5073to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass the "--" flag
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005074before the first string. Same applies of course to match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005075
5076
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020050777.3. Matching regular expressions (regexes)
5078-------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005079
5080Just like with string matching, regex matching applies to verbatim strings as
5081they are passed, with the exception of the backslash ("\") which makes it
5082possible to escape some characters such as the space. If the "-i" flag is
5083passed before the first regex, then the matching will be performed ignoring
5084the case. In order to match the string "-i", either set it second, or pass
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005085the "--" flag before the first string. Same principle applies of course to
5086match the string "--".
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005087
5088
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020050897.4. Matching IPv4 addresses
5090----------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005091
5092IPv4 addresses values can be specified either as plain addresses or with a
5093netmask appended, in which case the IPv4 address matches whenever it is
5094within the network. Plain addresses may also be replaced with a resolvable
Willy Tarreaud2a4aa22008-01-31 15:28:22 +01005095host name, but this practice is generally discouraged as it makes it more
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005096difficult to read and debug configurations. If hostnames are used, you should
5097at least ensure that they are present in /etc/hosts so that the configuration
5098does not depend on any random DNS match at the moment the configuration is
5099parsed.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005100
5101
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020051027.5. Available matching criteria
5103--------------------------------
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005104
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020051057.5.1. Matching at Layer 4 and below
5106------------------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005107
5108A first set of criteria applies to information which does not require any
5109analysis of the request or response contents. Those generally include TCP/IP
5110addresses and ports, as well as internal values independant on the stream.
5111
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005112always_false
5113 This one never matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5114 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5115
5116always_true
5117 This one always matches. All values and flags are ignored. It may be used as
5118 a temporary replacement for another one when adjusting configurations.
5119
5120src <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005121 Applies to the client's IPv4 address. It is usually used to limit access to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005122 certain resources such as statistics. Note that it is the TCP-level source
5123 address which is used, and not the address of a client behind a proxy.
5124
5125src_port <integer>
5126 Applies to the client's TCP source port. This has a very limited usage.
5127
5128dst <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005129 Applies to the local IPv4 address the client connected to. It can be used to
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005130 switch to a different backend for some alternative addresses.
5131
5132dst_port <integer>
5133 Applies to the local port the client connected to. It can be used to switch
5134 to a different backend for some alternative ports.
5135
5136dst_conn <integer>
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005137 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the same socket
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005138 including the one being evaluated. It can be used to either return a sorry
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005139 page before hard-blocking, or to use a specific backend to drain new requests
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005140 when the socket is considered saturated. This offers the ability to assign
5141 different limits to different listening ports or addresses. See also the
5142 "fe_conn" and "be_conn" criteria.
5143
5144fe_conn <integer>
5145fe_conn(frontend) <integer>
5146 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the frontend,
5147 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no frontend name is
5148 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5149 frontend. It can be used to either return a sorry page before hard-blocking,
5150 or to use a specific backend to drain new requests when the farm is
5151 considered saturated. See also the "dst_conn", "be_conn" and "fe_sess_rate"
5152 criteria.
5153
5154be_conn <integer>
5155be_conn(frontend) <integer>
5156 Applies to the number of currently established connections on the backend,
5157 possibly including the connection being evaluated. If no backend name is
5158 specified, the current one is used. But it is also possible to check another
5159 backend. It can be used to use a specific farm when the nominal one is full.
5160 See also the "fe_conn", "queue" and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005161
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005162nbsrv <integer>
5163nbsrv(backend) <integer>
5164 Returns true when the number of usable servers of either the current backend
5165 or the named backend matches the values or ranges specified. This is used to
5166 switch to an alternate backend when the number of servers is too low to
5167 to handle some load. It is useful to report a failure when combined with
5168 "monitor fail".
5169
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005170connslots <integer>
5171connslots(backend) <integer>
5172 The basic idea here is to be able to measure the number of connection "slots"
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005173 still available (connection + queue), so that anything beyond that (intended
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005174 usage; see "use_backend" keyword) can be redirected to a different backend.
5175
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005176 'connslots' = number of available server connection slots, + number of
5177 available server queue slots.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005178
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005179 Note that while "fe_conn" may be used, "connslots" comes in especially
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005180 useful when you have a case of traffic going to one single ip, splitting into
5181 multiple backends (perhaps using acls to do name-based load balancing) and
5182 you want to be able to differentiate between different backends, and their
5183 available "connslots". Also, whereas "nbsrv" only measures servers that are
5184 actually *down*, this acl is more fine-grained and looks into the number of
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005185 available connection slots as well. See also "queue" and "avg_queue".
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005186
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02005187 OTHER CAVEATS AND NOTES: at this point in time, the code does not take care
5188 of dynamic connections. Also, if any of the server maxconn, or maxqueue is 0,
5189 then this acl clearly does not make sense, in which case the value returned
5190 will be -1.
Jeffrey 'jf' Lim5051d7b2008-09-04 01:03:03 +08005191
Willy Tarreaua36af912009-10-10 12:02:45 +02005192queue <integer>
5193queue(frontend) <integer>
5194 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend,
5195 including all the connections in server queues. If no backend name is
5196 specified, the current one is used, but it is also possible to check another
5197 one. This can be used to take actions when queuing goes above a known level,
5198 generally indicating a surge of traffic or a massive slowdown on the servers.
5199 One possible action could be to reject new users but still accept old ones.
5200 See also the "avg_queue", "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5201
5202avg_queue <integer>
5203avg_queue(frontend) <integer>
5204 Returns the total number of queued connections of the designated backend
5205 divided by the number of active servers. This is very similar to "queue"
5206 except that the size of the farm is considered, in order to give a more
5207 accurate measurement of the time it may take for a new connection to be
5208 processed. The main usage is to return a sorry page to new users when it
5209 becomes certain they will get a degraded service. Note that in the event
5210 there would not be any active server anymore, we would consider twice the
5211 number of queued connections as the measured value. This is a fair estimate,
5212 as we expect one server to get back soon anyway, but we still prefer to send
5213 new traffic to another backend if in better shape. See also the "queue",
5214 "be_conn", and "be_sess_rate" criteria.
5215
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005216fe_sess_rate <integer>
5217fe_sess_rate(frontend) <integer>
5218 Returns true when the session creation rate on the current or the named
5219 frontend matches the specified values or ranges, expressed in new sessions
5220 per second. This is used to limit the connection rate to acceptable ranges in
5221 order to prevent abuse of service at the earliest moment. This can be
5222 combined with layer 4 ACLs in order to force the clients to wait a bit for
5223 the rate to go down below the limit.
5224
5225 Example :
5226 # This frontend limits incoming mails to 10/s with a max of 100
5227 # concurrent connections. We accept any connection below 10/s, and
5228 # force excess clients to wait for 100 ms. Since clients are limited to
5229 # 100 max, there cannot be more than 10 incoming mails per second.
5230 frontend mail
5231 bind :25
5232 mode tcp
5233 maxconn 100
5234 acl too_fast fe_sess_rate ge 10
5235 tcp-request inspect-delay 100ms
5236 tcp-request content accept if ! too_fast
5237 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
5238
5239be_sess_rate <integer>
5240be_sess_rate(backend) <integer>
5241 Returns true when the sessions creation rate on the backend matches the
5242 specified values or ranges, in number of new sessions per second. This is
5243 used to switch to an alternate backend when an expensive or fragile one
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005244 reaches too high a session rate, or to limit abuse of service (eg. prevent
Willy Tarreau079ff0a2009-03-05 21:34:28 +01005245 sucking of an online dictionary).
5246
5247 Example :
5248 # Redirect to an error page if the dictionary is requested too often
5249 backend dynamic
5250 mode http
5251 acl being_scanned be_sess_rate gt 100
5252 redirect location /denied.html if being_scanned
5253
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005254
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020052557.5.2. Matching contents at Layer 4
5256-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005257
5258A second set of criteria depends on data found in buffers, but which can change
5259during analysis. This requires that some data has been buffered, for instance
5260through TCP request content inspection. Please see the "tcp-request" keyword
5261for more detailed information on the subject.
5262
5263req_len <integer>
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005264 Returns true when the length of the data in the request buffer matches the
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005265 specified range. It is important to understand that this test does not
5266 return false as long as the buffer is changing. This means that a check with
5267 equality to zero will almost always immediately match at the beginning of the
5268 session, while a test for more data will wait for that data to come in and
5269 return false only when haproxy is certain that no more data will come in.
5270 This test was designed to be used with TCP request content inspection.
5271
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005272req_proto_http
5273 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like HTTP and correctly
5274 parses as such. It is the same parser as the common HTTP request parser which
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005275 is used so there should be no surprises. This test can be used for instance
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005276 to direct HTTP traffic to a given port and HTTPS traffic to another one
5277 using TCP request content inspection rules.
5278
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005279req_rdp_cookie <string>
5280req_rdp_cookie(name) <string>
5281 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol, and
5282 a cookie is present and equal to <string>. By default, any cookie name is
5283 checked, but a specific cookie name can be specified in parenthesis. The
5284 parser only checks for the first cookie, as illustrated in the RDP protocol
5285 specification. The cookie name is case insensitive. This ACL can be useful
5286 with the "MSTS" cookie, as it can contain the user name of the client
5287 connecting to the server if properly configured on the client. This can be
5288 used to restrict access to certain servers to certain users.
5289
5290req_rdp_cookie_cnt <integer>
5291req_rdp_cookie_cnt(name) <integer>
5292 Returns true when the data in the request buffer look like the RDP protocol
5293 and the number of RDP cookies matches the specified range (typically zero or
5294 one). Optionally a specific cookie name can be checked. This is a simple way
5295 of detecting the RDP protocol, as clients generally send the MSTS or MSTSHASH
5296 cookies.
5297
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005298req_ssl_ver <decimal>
5299 Returns true when data in the request buffer look like SSL, with a protocol
5300 version matching the specified range. Both SSLv2 hello messages and SSLv3
5301 messages are supported. The test tries to be strict enough to avoid being
5302 easily fooled. In particular, it waits for as many bytes as announced in the
5303 message header if this header looks valid (bound to the buffer size). Note
5304 that TLSv1 is announced as SSL version 3.1. This test was designed to be used
5305 with TCP request content inspection.
5306
Willy Tarreaub6fb4202008-07-20 11:18:28 +02005307wait_end
5308 Waits for the end of the analysis period to return true. This may be used in
5309 conjunction with content analysis to avoid returning a wrong verdict early.
5310 It may also be used to delay some actions, such as a delayed reject for some
5311 special addresses. Since it either stops the rules evaluation or immediately
5312 returns true, it is recommended to use this acl as the last one in a rule.
5313 Please note that the default ACL "WAIT_END" is always usable without prior
5314 declaration. This test was designed to be used with TCP request content
5315 inspection.
5316
5317 Examples :
5318 # delay every incoming request by 2 seconds
5319 tcp-request inspect-delay 2s
5320 tcp-request content accept if WAIT_END
5321
5322 # don't immediately tell bad guys they are rejected
5323 tcp-request inspect-delay 10s
5324 acl goodguys src 10.0.0.0/24
5325 acl badguys src 10.0.1.0/24
5326 tcp-request content accept if goodguys
5327 tcp-request content reject if badguys WAIT_END
5328 tcp-request content reject
5329
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005330
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020053317.5.3. Matching at Layer 7
5332--------------------------
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005333
Willy Tarreau62644772008-07-16 18:36:06 +02005334A third set of criteria applies to information which can be found at the
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005335application layer (layer 7). Those require that a full HTTP request has been
5336read, and are only evaluated then. They may require slightly more CPU resources
5337than the layer 4 ones, but not much since the request and response are indexed.
5338
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005339method <string>
5340 Applies to the method in the HTTP request, eg: "GET". Some predefined ACL
5341 already check for most common methods.
5342
5343req_ver <string>
5344 Applies to the version string in the HTTP request, eg: "1.0". Some predefined
5345 ACL already check for versions 1.0 and 1.1.
5346
5347path <string>
5348 Returns true when the path part of the request, which starts at the first
5349 slash and ends before the question mark, equals one of the strings. It may be
5350 used to match known files, such as /favicon.ico.
5351
5352path_beg <string>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005353 Returns true when the path begins with one of the strings. This can be used
5354 to send certain directory names to alternative backends.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005355
5356path_end <string>
5357 Returns true when the path ends with one of the strings. This may be used to
5358 control file name extension.
5359
5360path_sub <string>
5361 Returns true when the path contains one of the strings. It can be used to
5362 detect particular patterns in paths, such as "../" for example. See also
5363 "path_dir".
5364
5365path_dir <string>
5366 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
5367 slashes in the path. This is used to perform filename or directory name
5368 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
5369 "url_dir" and "path_sub".
5370
5371path_dom <string>
5372 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
5373 in the path. This may be used to perform domain name matching in proxy
5374 requests. See also "path_sub" and "url_dom".
5375
5376path_reg <regex>
5377 Returns true when the path matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
5378 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
5379 than other methods. See also "url_reg" and all "path_" criteria.
5380
5381url <string>
5382 Applies to the whole URL passed in the request. The only real use is to match
5383 "*", for which there already is a predefined ACL.
5384
5385url_beg <string>
5386 Returns true when the URL begins with one of the strings. This can be used to
5387 check whether a URL begins with a slash or with a protocol scheme.
5388
5389url_end <string>
5390 Returns true when the URL ends with one of the strings. It has very limited
5391 use. "path_end" should be used instead for filename matching.
5392
5393url_sub <string>
5394 Returns true when the URL contains one of the strings. It can be used to
5395 detect particular patterns in query strings for example. See also "path_sub".
5396
5397url_dir <string>
5398 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with
5399 slashes in the URL. This is used to perform filename or directory name
5400 matching without the risk of wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also
5401 "path_dir" and "url_sub".
5402
5403url_dom <string>
5404 Returns true when one of the strings is found isolated or delimited with dots
5405 in the URL. This is used to perform domain name matching without the risk of
5406 wrong match due to colliding prefixes. See also "url_sub".
5407
5408url_reg <regex>
5409 Returns true when the URL matches one of the regular expressions. It can be
5410 used any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching is slower
5411 than other methods. See also "path_reg" and all "url_" criteria.
5412
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01005413url_ip <ip_address>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005414 Applies to the IP address specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request.
5415 It can be used to prevent access to certain resources such as local network.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01005416 It is useful with option "http_proxy".
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01005417
5418url_port <integer>
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005419 Applies to the port specified in the absolute URI in an HTTP request. It can
5420 be used to prevent access to certain resources. It is useful with option
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01005421 "http_proxy". Note that if the port is not specified in the request, port 80
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005422 is assumed.
Alexandre Cassen5eb1a902007-11-29 15:43:32 +01005423
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005424hdr <string>
5425hdr(header) <string>
5426 Note: all the "hdr*" matching criteria either apply to all headers, or to a
5427 particular header whose name is passed between parenthesis and without any
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005428 space. The header name is not case-sensitive. The header matching complies
5429 with RFC2616, and treats as separate headers all values delimited by commas.
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005430
5431 The "hdr" criteria returns true if any of the headers matching the criteria
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01005432 match any of the strings. This can be used to check exact for values. For
Willy Tarreau6a06a402007-07-15 20:15:28 +02005433 instance, checking that "connection: close" is set :
5434
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005435 hdr(Connection) -i close
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01005436
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005437hdr_beg <string>
5438hdr_beg(header) <string>
5439 Returns true when one of the headers begins with one of the strings. See
5440 "hdr" for more information on header matching.
Willy Tarreau21d2af32008-02-14 20:25:24 +01005441
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005442hdr_end <string>
5443hdr_end(header) <string>
5444 Returns true when one of the headers ends with one of the strings. See "hdr"
5445 for more information on header matching.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01005446
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005447hdr_sub <string>
5448hdr_sub(header) <string>
5449 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings. See "hdr"
5450 for more information on header matching.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01005451
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005452hdr_dir <string>
5453hdr_dir(header) <string>
5454 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
5455 isolated or delimited by slashes. This is used to perform filename or
5456 directory name matching, and may be used with Referer. See "hdr" for more
5457 information on header matching.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01005458
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005459hdr_dom <string>
5460hdr_dom(header) <string>
5461 Returns true when one of the headers contains one of the strings either
5462 isolated or delimited by dots. This is used to perform domain name matching,
5463 and may be used with the Host header. See "hdr" for more information on
5464 header matching.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01005465
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005466hdr_reg <regex>
5467hdr_reg(header) <regex>
5468 Returns true when one of the headers matches of the regular expressions. It
5469 can be used at any time, but it is important to remember that regex matching
5470 is slower than other methods. See also other "hdr_" criteria, as well as
5471 "hdr" for more information on header matching.
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01005472
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005473hdr_val <integer>
5474hdr_val(header) <integer>
5475 Returns true when one of the headers starts with a number which matches the
5476 values or ranges specified. This may be used to limit content-length to
5477 acceptable values for example. See "hdr" for more information on header
5478 matching.
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01005479
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005480hdr_cnt <integer>
5481hdr_cnt(header) <integer>
5482 Returns true when the number of occurrence of the specified header matches
5483 the values or ranges specified. It is important to remember that one header
5484 line may count as several headers if it has several values. This is used to
5485 detect presence, absence or abuse of a specific header, as well as to block
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005486 request smuggling attacks by rejecting requests which contain more than one
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005487 of certain headers. See "hdr" for more information on header matching.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkic8b16fc2008-02-18 01:26:35 +01005488
Willy Tarreau106f9792009-09-19 07:54:16 +02005489hdr_ip <ip_address>
5490hdr_ip(header) <ip_address>
5491 Returns true when one of the headers' values contains an IP address matching
5492 <ip_address>. This is mainly used with headers such as X-Forwarded-For or
5493 X-Client-IP. See "hdr" for more information on header matching.
5494
Willy Tarreau198a7442008-01-17 12:05:32 +01005495
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020054967.6. Pre-defined ACLs
5497---------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005498
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005499Some predefined ACLs are hard-coded so that they do not have to be declared in
5500every frontend which needs them. They all have their names in upper case in
5501order to avoid confusion. Their equivalence is provided below. Please note that
5502only the first three ones are not layer 7 based.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005503
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005504ACL name Equivalent to Usage
5505---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
5506TRUE always_true always match
5507FALSE always_false never match
5508LOCALHOST src 127.0.0.1/8 match connection from local host
Willy Tarreau2492d5b2009-07-11 00:06:00 +02005509HTTP req_proto_http match if protocol is valid HTTP
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005510HTTP_1.0 req_ver 1.0 match HTTP version 1.0
5511HTTP_1.1 req_ver 1.1 match HTTP version 1.1
5512METH_CONNECT method CONNECT match HTTP CONNECT method
5513METH_GET method GET HEAD match HTTP GET or HEAD method
5514METH_HEAD method HEAD match HTTP HEAD method
5515METH_OPTIONS method OPTIONS match HTTP OPTIONS method
5516METH_POST method POST match HTTP POST method
5517METH_TRACE method TRACE match HTTP TRACE method
5518HTTP_URL_ABS url_reg ^[^/:]*:// match absolute URL with scheme
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005519HTTP_URL_SLASH url_beg / match URL beginning with "/"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005520HTTP_URL_STAR url * match URL equal to "*"
5521HTTP_CONTENT hdr_val(content-length) gt 0 match an existing content-length
Emeric Brunbede3d02009-06-30 17:54:00 +02005522RDP_COOKIE req_rdp_cookie_cnt gt 0 match presence of an RDP cookie
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005523REQ_CONTENT req_len gt 0 match data in the request buffer
5524WAIT_END wait_end wait for end of content analysis
5525---------------+-----------------------------+---------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005526
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005527
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020055287.7. Using ACLs to form conditions
5529----------------------------------
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005530
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005531Some actions are only performed upon a valid condition. A condition is a
5532combination of ACLs with operators. 3 operators are supported :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005533
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005534 - AND (implicit)
5535 - OR (explicit with the "or" keyword or the "||" operator)
5536 - Negation with the exclamation mark ("!")
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005537
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005538A condition is formed as a disjunctive form:
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005539
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005540 [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln { or [!]acl1 [!]acl2 ... [!]acln } ...
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005541
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005542Such conditions are generally used after an "if" or "unless" statement,
5543indicating when the condition will trigger the action.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005544
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005545For instance, to block HTTP requests to the "*" URL with methods other than
5546"OPTIONS", as well as POST requests without content-length, and GET or HEAD
5547requests with a content-length greater than 0, and finally every request which
5548is not either GET/HEAD/POST/OPTIONS !
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005549
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005550 acl missing_cl hdr_cnt(Content-length) eq 0
5551 block if HTTP_URL_STAR !METH_OPTIONS || METH_POST missing_cl
5552 block if METH_GET HTTP_CONTENT
5553 block unless METH_GET or METH_POST or METH_OPTIONS
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005554
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005555To select a different backend for requests to static contents on the "www" site
5556and to every request on the "img", "video", "download" and "ftp" hosts :
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005557
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005558 acl url_static path_beg /static /images /img /css
5559 acl url_static path_end .gif .png .jpg .css .js
5560 acl host_www hdr_beg(host) -i www
5561 acl host_static hdr_beg(host) -i img. video. download. ftp.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005562
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005563 # now use backend "static" for all static-only hosts, and for static urls
5564 # of host "www". Use backend "www" for the rest.
5565 use_backend static if host_static or host_www url_static
5566 use_backend www if host_www
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005567
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005568See section 4.2 for detailed help on the "block" and "use_backend" keywords.
Willy Tarreauced27012008-01-17 20:35:34 +01005569
Willy Tarreau5764b382007-11-30 17:46:49 +01005570
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020055718. Logging
5572----------
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01005573
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005574One of HAProxy's strong points certainly lies is its precise logs. It probably
5575provides the finest level of information available for such a product, which is
5576very important for troubleshooting complex environments. Standard information
5577provided in logs include client ports, TCP/HTTP state timers, precise session
5578state at termination and precise termination cause, information about decisions
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01005579to direct traffic to a server, and of course the ability to capture arbitrary
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005580headers.
5581
5582In order to improve administrators reactivity, it offers a great transparency
5583about encountered problems, both internal and external, and it is possible to
5584send logs to different sources at the same time with different level filters :
5585
5586 - global process-level logs (system errors, start/stop, etc..)
5587 - per-instance system and internal errors (lack of resource, bugs, ...)
5588 - per-instance external troubles (servers up/down, max connections)
5589 - per-instance activity (client connections), either at the establishment or
5590 at the termination.
5591
5592The ability to distribute different levels of logs to different log servers
5593allow several production teams to interact and to fix their problems as soon
5594as possible. For example, the system team might monitor system-wide errors,
5595while the application team might be monitoring the up/down for their servers in
5596real time, and the security team might analyze the activity logs with one hour
5597delay.
5598
5599
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020056008.1. Log levels
5601---------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005602
5603TCP and HTTP connections can be logged with informations such as date, time,
5604source IP address, destination address, connection duration, response times,
5605HTTP request, the HTTP return code, number of bytes transmitted, the conditions
5606in which the session ended, and even exchanged cookies values, to track a
5607particular user's problems for example. All messages are sent to up to two
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005608syslog servers. Check the "log" keyword in section 4.2 for more info about log
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005609facilities.
5610
5611
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020056128.2. Log formats
5613----------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005614
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02005615HAProxy supports 4 log formats. Several fields are common between these formats
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005616and will be detailed in the next sections. A few of them may slightly vary with
5617the configuration, due to indicators specific to certain options. The supported
5618formats are the following ones :
5619
5620 - the default format, which is very basic and very rarely used. It only
5621 provides very basic information about the incoming connection at the moment
5622 it is accepted : source IP:port, destination IP:port, and frontend-name.
5623 This mode will eventually disappear so it will not be described to great
5624 extents.
5625
5626 - the TCP format, which is more advanced. This format is enabled when "option
5627 tcplog" is set on the frontend. HAProxy will then usually wait for the
5628 connection to terminate before logging. This format provides much richer
5629 information, such as timers, connection counts, queue size, etc... This
5630 format is recommended for pure TCP proxies.
5631
5632 - the HTTP format, which is the most advanced for HTTP proxying. This format
5633 is enabled when "option httplog" is set on the frontend. It provides the
5634 same information as the TCP format with some HTTP-specific fields such as
5635 the request, the status code, and captures of headers and cookies. This
5636 format is recommended for HTTP proxies.
5637
Emeric Brun3a058f32009-06-30 18:26:00 +02005638 - the CLF HTTP format, which is equivalent to the HTTP format, but with the
5639 fields arranged in the same order as the CLF format. In this mode, all
5640 timers, captures, flags, etc... appear one per field after the end of the
5641 common fields, in the same order they appear in the standard HTTP format.
5642
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005643Next sections will go deeper into details for each of these formats. Format
5644specification will be performed on a "field" basis. Unless stated otherwise, a
5645field is a portion of text delimited by any number of spaces. Since syslog
5646servers are susceptible of inserting fields at the beginning of a line, it is
5647always assumed that the first field is the one containing the process name and
5648identifier.
5649
5650Note : Since log lines may be quite long, the log examples in sections below
5651 might be broken into multiple lines. The example log lines will be
5652 prefixed with 3 closing angle brackets ('>>>') and each time a log is
5653 broken into multiple lines, each non-final line will end with a
5654 backslash ('\') and the next line will start indented by two characters.
5655
5656
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020056578.2.1. Default log format
5658-------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005659
5660This format is used when no specific option is set. The log is emitted as soon
5661as the connection is accepted. One should note that this currently is the only
5662format which logs the request's destination IP and ports.
5663
5664 Example :
5665 listen www
5666 mode http
5667 log global
5668 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
5669
5670 >>> Feb 6 12:12:09 localhost \
5671 haproxy[14385]: Connect from 10.0.1.2:33312 to 10.0.3.31:8012 \
5672 (www/HTTP)
5673
5674 Field Format Extract from the example above
5675 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14385]:
5676 2 'Connect from' Connect from
5677 3 source_ip ':' source_port 10.0.1.2:33312
5678 4 'to' to
5679 5 destination_ip ':' destination_port 10.0.3.31:8012
5680 6 '(' frontend_name '/' mode ')' (www/HTTP)
5681
5682Detailed fields description :
5683 - "source_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the connection.
5684 - "source_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
5685 - "destination_ip" is the IP address the client connected to.
5686 - "destination_port" is the TCP port the client connected to.
5687 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
5688 and processed the connection.
5689 - "mode is the mode the frontend is operating (TCP or HTTP).
5690
5691It is advised not to use this deprecated format for newer installations as it
5692will eventually disappear.
5693
5694
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020056958.2.2. TCP log format
5696---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005697
5698The TCP format is used when "option tcplog" is specified in the frontend, and
5699is the recommended format for pure TCP proxies. It provides a lot of precious
5700information for troubleshooting. Since this format includes timers and byte
5701counts, the log is normally emitted at the end of the session. It can be
5702emitted earlier if "option logasap" is specified, which makes sense in most
5703environments with long sessions such as remote terminals. Sessions which match
5704the "monitor" rules are never logged. It is also possible not to emit logs for
5705sessions for which no data were exchanged between the client and the server, by
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02005706specifying "option dontlognull" in the frontend. Successful connections will
5707not be logged if "option dontlog-normal" is specified in the frontend. A few
5708fields may slightly vary depending on some configuration options, those are
5709marked with a star ('*') after the field name below.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005710
5711 Example :
5712 frontend fnt
5713 mode tcp
5714 option tcplog
5715 log global
5716 default_backend bck
5717
5718 backend bck
5719 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
5720
5721 >>> Feb 6 12:12:56 localhost \
5722 haproxy[14387]: 10.0.1.2:33313 [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443] fnt \
5723 bck/srv1 0/0/5007 212 -- 0/0/0/0/3 0/0
5724
5725 Field Format Extract from the example above
5726 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14387]:
5727 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33313
5728 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:12:51.443]
5729 4 frontend_name fnt
5730 5 backend_name '/' server_name bck/srv1
5731 6 Tw '/' Tc '/' Tt* 0/0/5007
5732 7 bytes_read* 212
5733 8 termination_state --
5734 9 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 0/0/0/0/3
5735 10 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
5736
5737Detailed fields description :
5738 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
5739 connection to haproxy.
5740
5741 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
5742
5743 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the connection was received by haproxy
5744 (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on the
5745 network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is usually
5746 the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log.
5747
5748 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
5749 and processed the connection.
5750
5751 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
5752 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
5753 frontend if no switching rule has been applied, which is common for TCP
5754 applications.
5755
5756 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
5757 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
5758 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
5759 which processed the request. If the connection was aborted before reaching
5760 a server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name.
5761
5762 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
5763 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
5764 See "Timers" below for more details.
5765
5766 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
5767 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
5768 connection was aborted before a connection could be established. See
5769 "Timers" below for more details.
5770
5771 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
5772 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
5773 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
5774 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
5775 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
5776 details.
5777
5778 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted from the server to
5779 the client when the log is emitted. If "option logasap" is specified, the
5780 this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that the final one
5781 may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit counter, so log
5782 analysis tools must be able to handle it without overflowing.
5783
5784 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
5785 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
5786 session to happen, and for what reason (timeout, error, ...). The normal
5787 flags should be "--", indicating the session was closed by either end with
5788 no data remaining in buffers. See below "Session state at disconnection"
5789 for more details.
5790
5791 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
5792 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
5793 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 when
5794 multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system limits
5795 the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all of them
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02005796 are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the system.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005797
5798 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
5799 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
5800 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
5801 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
5802 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
5803 caused by a denial of service attack.
5804
5805 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
5806 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
5807 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
5808 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
5809 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
5810 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
5811 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
5812 denial of service attack.
5813
5814 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
5815 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
5816 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
5817 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
5818 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
5819 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
5820 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
5821 that this server has some trouble causing the connections to take longer to
5822 be processed than on other servers.
5823
5824 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
5825 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
5826 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
5827 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
5828 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
5829 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
5830 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
5831 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
5832 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
5833 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
5834 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
5835 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
5836 should not be attributed to the logged server.
5837
5838 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
5839 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
5840 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
5841 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
5842 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
5843 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
5844 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
5845 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
5846
5847 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
5848 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
5849 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
5850 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
5851 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
5852 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
5853 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
5854 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
5855 occurs.
5856
5857
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020058588.2.3. HTTP log format
5859----------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005860
5861The HTTP format is the most complete and the best suited for HTTP proxies. It
5862is enabled by when "option httplog" is specified in the frontend. It provides
5863the same level of information as the TCP format with additional features which
5864are specific to the HTTP protocol. Just like the TCP format, the log is usually
5865emitted at the end of the session, unless "option logasap" is specified, which
5866generally only makes sense for download sites. A session which matches the
5867"monitor" rules will never logged. It is also possible not to log sessions for
5868which no data were sent by the client by specifying "option dontlognull" in the
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02005869frontend. Successful connections will not be logged if "option dontlog-normal"
5870is specified in the frontend.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01005871
5872Most fields are shared with the TCP log, some being different. A few fields may
5873slightly vary depending on some configuration options. Those ones are marked
5874with a star ('*') after the field name below.
5875
5876 Example :
5877 frontend http-in
5878 mode http
5879 option httplog
5880 log global
5881 default_backend bck
5882
5883 backend static
5884 server srv1 127.0.0.1:8000
5885
5886 >>> Feb 6 12:14:14 localhost \
5887 haproxy[14389]: 10.0.1.2:33317 [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655] http-in \
5888 static/srv1 10/0/30/69/109 200 2750 - - ---- 1/1/1/1/0 0/0 {1wt.eu} \
5889 {} "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
5890
5891 Field Format Extract from the example above
5892 1 process_name '[' pid ']:' haproxy[14389]:
5893 2 client_ip ':' client_port 10.0.1.2:33317
5894 3 '[' accept_date ']' [06/Feb/2009:12:14:14.655]
5895 4 frontend_name http-in
5896 5 backend_name '/' server_name static/srv1
5897 6 Tq '/' Tw '/' Tc '/' Tr '/' Tt* 10/0/30/69/109
5898 7 status_code 200
5899 8 bytes_read* 2750
5900 9 captured_request_cookie -
5901 10 captured_response_cookie -
5902 11 termination_state ----
5903 12 actconn '/' feconn '/' beconn '/' srv_conn '/' retries* 1/1/1/1/0
5904 13 srv_queue '/' backend_queue 0/0
5905 14 '{' captured_request_headers* '}' {haproxy.1wt.eu}
5906 15 '{' captured_response_headers* '}' {}
5907 16 '"' http_request '"' "GET /index.html HTTP/1.1"
5908
5909
5910Detailed fields description :
5911 - "client_ip" is the IP address of the client which initiated the TCP
5912 connection to haproxy.
5913
5914 - "client_port" is the TCP port of the client which initiated the connection.
5915
5916 - "accept_date" is the exact date when the TCP connection was received by
5917 haproxy (which might be very slightly different from the date observed on
5918 the network if there was some queuing in the system's backlog). This is
5919 usually the same date which may appear in any upstream firewall's log. This
5920 does not depend on the fact that the client has sent the request or not.
5921
5922 - "frontend_name" is the name of the frontend (or listener) which received
5923 and processed the connection.
5924
5925 - "backend_name" is the name of the backend (or listener) which was selected
5926 to manage the connection to the server. This will be the same as the
5927 frontend if no switching rule has been applied.
5928
5929 - "server_name" is the name of the last server to which the connection was
5930 sent, which might differ from the first one if there were connection errors
5931 and a redispatch occurred. Note that this server belongs to the backend
5932 which processed the request. If the request was aborted before reaching a
5933 server, "<NOSRV>" is indicated instead of a server name. If the request was
5934 intercepted by the stats subsystem, "<STATS>" is indicated instead.
5935
5936 - "Tq" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the client to send
5937 a full HTTP request, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the connection
5938 was aborted before a complete request could be received. It should always
5939 be very small because a request generally fits in one single packet. Large
5940 times here generally indicate network trouble between the client and
5941 haproxy. See "Timers" below for more details.
5942
5943 - "Tw" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting in the various queues.
5944 It can be "-1" if the connection was aborted before reaching the queue.
5945 See "Timers" below for more details.
5946
5947 - "Tc" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the connection to
5948 establish to the final server, including retries. It can be "-1" if the
5949 request was aborted before a connection could be established. See "Timers"
5950 below for more details.
5951
5952 - "Tr" is the total time in milliseconds spent waiting for the server to send
5953 a full HTTP response, not counting data. It can be "-1" if the request was
5954 aborted before a complete response could be received. It generally matches
5955 the server's processing time for the request, though it may be altered by
5956 the amount of data sent by the client to the server. Large times here on
5957 "GET" requests generally indicate an overloaded server. See "Timers" below
5958 for more details.
5959
5960 - "Tt" is the total time in milliseconds elapsed between the accept and the
5961 last close. It covers all possible processings. There is one exception, if
5962 "option logasap" was specified, then the time counting stops at the moment
5963 the log is emitted. In this case, a '+' sign is prepended before the value,
5964 indicating that the final one will be larger. See "Timers" below for more
5965 details.
5966
5967 - "status_code" is the HTTP status code returned to the client. This status
5968 is generally set by the server, but it might also be set by haproxy when
5969 the server cannot be reached or when its response is blocked by haproxy.
5970
5971 - "bytes_read" is the total number of bytes transmitted to the client when
5972 the log is emitted. This does include HTTP headers. If "option logasap" is
5973 specified, the this value will be prefixed with a '+' sign indicating that
5974 the final one may be larger. Please note that this value is a 64-bit
5975 counter, so log analysis tools must be able to handle it without
5976 overflowing.
5977
5978 - "captured_request_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating that
5979 the client had this cookie in the request. The cookie name and its maximum
5980 length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend
5981 configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is not
5982 set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track session
5983 ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session crossing
5984 between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please consult
5985 the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
5986
5987 - "captured_response_cookie" is an optional "name=value" entry indicating
5988 that the server has returned a cookie with its response. The cookie name
5989 and its maximum length are defined by the "capture cookie" statement in the
5990 frontend configuration. The field is a single dash ('-') when the option is
5991 not set. Only one cookie may be captured, it is generally used to track
5992 session ID exchanges between a client and a server to detect session
5993 crossing between clients due to application bugs. For more details, please
5994 consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and cookies" below.
5995
5996 - "termination_state" is the condition the session was in when the session
5997 ended. This indicates the session state, which side caused the end of
5998 session to happen, for what reason (timeout, error, ...), just like in TCP
5999 logs, and information about persistence operations on cookies in the last
6000 two characters. The normal flags should begin with "--", indicating the
6001 session was closed by either end with no data remaining in buffers. See
6002 below "Session state at disconnection" for more details.
6003
6004 - "actconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the process when
6005 the session was logged. It it useful to detect when some per-process system
6006 limits have been reached. For instance, if actconn is close to 512 or 1024
6007 when multiple connection errors occur, chances are high that the system
6008 limits the process to use a maximum of 1024 file descriptors and that all
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006009 of them are used. See section 3 "Global parameters" to find how to tune the
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006010 system.
6011
6012 - "feconn" is the total number of concurrent connections on the frontend when
6013 the session was logged. It is useful to estimate the amount of resource
6014 required to sustain high loads, and to detect when the frontend's "maxconn"
6015 has been reached. Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is
6016 because there is congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be
6017 caused by a denial of service attack.
6018
6019 - "beconn" is the total number of concurrent connections handled by the
6020 backend when the session was logged. It includes the total number of
6021 concurrent connections active on servers as well as the number of
6022 connections pending in queues. It is useful to estimate the amount of
6023 additional servers needed to support high loads for a given application.
6024 Most often when this value increases by huge jumps, it is because there is
6025 congestion on the backend servers, but sometimes it can be caused by a
6026 denial of service attack.
6027
6028 - "srv_conn" is the total number of concurrent connections still active on
6029 the server when the session was logged. It can never exceed the server's
6030 configured "maxconn" parameter. If this value is very often close or equal
6031 to the server's "maxconn", it means that traffic regulation is involved a
6032 lot, meaning that either the server's maxconn value is too low, or that
6033 there aren't enough servers to process the load with an optimal response
6034 time. When only one of the server's "srv_conn" is high, it usually means
6035 that this server has some trouble causing the requests to take longer to be
6036 processed than on other servers.
6037
6038 - "retries" is the number of connection retries experienced by this session
6039 when trying to connect to the server. It must normally be zero, unless a
6040 server is being stopped at the same moment the connection was attempted.
6041 Frequent retries generally indicate either a network problem between
6042 haproxy and the server, or a misconfigured system backlog on the server
6043 preventing new connections from being queued. This field may optionally be
6044 prefixed with a '+' sign, indicating that the session has experienced a
6045 redispatch after the maximal retry count has been reached on the initial
6046 server. In this case, the server name appearing in the log is the one the
6047 connection was redispatched to, and not the first one, though both may
6048 sometimes be the same in case of hashing for instance. So as a general rule
6049 of thumb, when a '+' is present in front of the retry count, this count
6050 should not be attributed to the logged server.
6051
6052 - "srv_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6053 this one in the server queue. It is zero when the request has not gone
6054 through the server queue. It makes it possible to estimate the approximate
6055 server's response time by dividing the time spent in queue by the number of
6056 requests in the queue. It is worth noting that if a session experiences a
6057 redispatch and passes through two server queues, their positions will be
6058 cumulated. A request should not pass through both the server queue and the
6059 backend queue unless a redispatch occurs.
6060
6061 - "backend_queue" is the total number of requests which were processed before
6062 this one in the backend's global queue. It is zero when the request has not
6063 gone through the global queue. It makes it possible to estimate the average
6064 queue length, which easily translates into a number of missing servers when
6065 divided by a server's "maxconn" parameter. It is worth noting that if a
6066 session experiences a redispatch, it may pass twice in the backend's queue,
6067 and then both positions will be cumulated. A request should not pass
6068 through both the server queue and the backend queue unless a redispatch
6069 occurs.
6070
6071 - "captured_request_headers" is a list of headers captured in the request due
6072 to the presence of the "capture request header" statement in the frontend.
6073 Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a vertical bar
6074 ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear, causing a
6075 shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this field may
6076 contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser than when
6077 it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers and
6078 cookies" below for more details.
6079
6080 - "captured_response_headers" is a list of headers captured in the response
6081 due to the presence of the "capture response header" statement in the
6082 frontend. Multiple headers can be captured, they will be delimited by a
6083 vertical bar ('|'). When no capture is enabled, the braces do not appear,
6084 causing a shift of remaining fields. It is important to note that this
6085 field may contain spaces, and that using it requires a smarter log parser
6086 than when it's not used. Please consult the section "Capturing HTTP headers
6087 and cookies" below for more details.
6088
6089 - "http_request" is the complete HTTP request line, including the method,
6090 request and HTTP version string. Non-printable characters are encoded (see
6091 below the section "Non-printable characters"). This is always the last
6092 field, and it is always delimited by quotes and is the only one which can
6093 contain quotes. If new fields are added to the log format, they will be
6094 added before this field. This field might be truncated if the request is
6095 huge and does not fit in the standard syslog buffer (1024 characters). This
6096 is the reason why this field must always remain the last one.
6097
6098
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020060998.3. Advanced logging options
6100-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006101
6102Some advanced logging options are often looked for but are not easy to find out
6103just by looking at the various options. Here is an entry point for the few
6104options which can enable better logging. Please refer to the keywords reference
6105for more information about their usage.
6106
6107
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061088.3.1. Disabling logging of external tests
6109------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006110
6111It is quite common to have some monitoring tools perform health checks on
6112haproxy. Sometimes it will be a layer 3 load-balancer such as LVS or any
6113commercial load-balancer, and sometimes it will simply be a more complete
6114monitoring system such as Nagios. When the tests are very frequent, users often
6115ask how to disable logging for those checks. There are three possibilities :
6116
6117 - if connections come from everywhere and are just TCP probes, it is often
6118 desired to simply disable logging of connections without data exchange, by
6119 setting "option dontlognull" in the frontend. It also disables logging of
6120 port scans, which may or may not be desired.
6121
6122 - if the connection come from a known source network, use "monitor-net" to
6123 declare this network as monitoring only. Any host in this network will then
6124 only be able to perform health checks, and their requests will not be
6125 logged. This is generally appropriate to designate a list of equipments
6126 such as other load-balancers.
6127
6128 - if the tests are performed on a known URI, use "monitor-uri" to declare
6129 this URI as dedicated to monitoring. Any host sending this request will
6130 only get the result of a health-check, and the request will not be logged.
6131
6132
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061338.3.2. Logging before waiting for the session to terminate
6134----------------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006135
6136The problem with logging at end of connection is that you have no clue about
6137what is happening during very long sessions, such as remote terminal sessions
6138or large file downloads. This problem can be worked around by specifying
6139"option logasap" in the frontend. Haproxy will then log as soon as possible,
6140just before data transfer begins. This means that in case of TCP, it will still
6141log the connection status to the server, and in case of HTTP, it will log just
6142after processing the server headers. In this case, the number of bytes reported
6143is the number of header bytes sent to the client. In order to avoid confusion
6144with normal logs, the total time field and the number of bytes are prefixed
6145with a '+' sign which means that real numbers are certainly larger.
6146
6147
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061488.3.3. Raising log level upon errors
6149------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006150
6151Sometimes it is more convenient to separate normal traffic from errors logs,
6152for instance in order to ease error monitoring from log files. When the option
6153"log-separate-errors" is used, connections which experience errors, timeouts,
6154retries, redispatches or HTTP status codes 5xx will see their syslog level
6155raised from "info" to "err". This will help a syslog daemon store the log in
6156a separate file. It is very important to keep the errors in the normal traffic
6157file too, so that log ordering is not altered. You should also be careful if
6158you already have configured your syslog daemon to store all logs higher than
6159"notice" in an "admin" file, because the "err" level is higher than "notice".
6160
6161
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061628.3.4. Disabling logging of successful connections
6163--------------------------------------------------
Willy Tarreauc9bd0cc2009-05-10 11:57:02 +02006164
6165Although this may sound strange at first, some large sites have to deal with
6166multiple thousands of logs per second and are experiencing difficulties keeping
6167them intact for a long time or detecting errors within them. If the option
6168"dontlog-normal" is set on the frontend, all normal connections will not be
6169logged. In this regard, a normal connection is defined as one without any
6170error, timeout, retry nor redispatch. In HTTP, the status code is checked too,
6171and a response with a status 5xx is not considered normal and will be logged
6172too. Of course, doing is is really discouraged as it will remove most of the
6173useful information from the logs. Do this only if you have no other
6174alternative.
6175
6176
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020061778.4. Timing events
6178------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006179
6180Timers provide a great help in troubleshooting network problems. All values are
6181reported in milliseconds (ms). These timers should be used in conjunction with
6182the session termination flags. In TCP mode with "option tcplog" set on the
6183frontend, 3 control points are reported under the form "Tw/Tc/Tt", and in HTTP
6184mode, 5 control points are reported under the form "Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/Tt" :
6185
6186 - Tq: total time to get the client request (HTTP mode only). It's the time
6187 elapsed between the moment the client connection was accepted and the
6188 moment the proxy received the last HTTP header. The value "-1" indicates
6189 that the end of headers (empty line) has never been seen. This happens when
6190 the client closes prematurely or times out.
6191
6192 - Tw: total time spent in the queues waiting for a connection slot. It
6193 accounts for backend queue as well as the server queues, and depends on the
6194 queue size, and the time needed for the server to complete previous
6195 requests. The value "-1" means that the request was killed before reaching
6196 the queue, which is generally what happens with invalid or denied requests.
6197
6198 - Tc: total time to establish the TCP connection to the server. It's the time
6199 elapsed between the moment the proxy sent the connection request, and the
6200 moment it was acknowledged by the server, or between the TCP SYN packet and
6201 the matching SYN/ACK packet in return. The value "-1" means that the
6202 connection never established.
6203
6204 - Tr: server response time (HTTP mode only). It's the time elapsed between
6205 the moment the TCP connection was established to the server and the moment
6206 the server sent its complete response headers. It purely shows its request
6207 processing time, without the network overhead due to the data transmission.
6208 It is worth noting that when the client has data to send to the server, for
6209 instance during a POST request, the time already runs, and this can distort
6210 apparent response time. For this reason, it's generally wise not to trust
6211 too much this field for POST requests initiated from clients behind an
6212 untrusted network. A value of "-1" here means that the last the response
6213 header (empty line) was never seen, most likely because the server timeout
6214 stroke before the server managed to process the request.
6215
6216 - Tt: total session duration time, between the moment the proxy accepted it
6217 and the moment both ends were closed. The exception is when the "logasap"
6218 option is specified. In this case, it only equals (Tq+Tw+Tc+Tr), and is
6219 prefixed with a '+' sign. From this field, we can deduce "Td", the data
6220 transmission time, by substracting other timers when valid :
6221
6222 Td = Tt - (Tq + Tw + Tc + Tr)
6223
6224 Timers with "-1" values have to be excluded from this equation. In TCP
6225 mode, "Tq" and "Tr" have to be excluded too. Note that "Tt" can never be
6226 negative.
6227
6228These timers provide precious indications on trouble causes. Since the TCP
6229protocol defines retransmit delays of 3, 6, 12... seconds, we know for sure
6230that timers close to multiples of 3s are nearly always related to lost packets
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006231due to network problems (wires, negotiation, congestion). Moreover, if "Tt" is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006232close to a timeout value specified in the configuration, it often means that a
6233session has been aborted on timeout.
6234
6235Most common cases :
6236
6237 - If "Tq" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
6238 client and the proxy. This is very rare on local networks but might happen
6239 when clients are on far remote networks and send large requests. It may
6240 happen that values larger than usual appear here without any network cause.
6241 Sometimes, during an attack or just after a resource starvation has ended,
6242 haproxy may accept thousands of connections in a few milliseconds. The time
6243 spent accepting these connections will inevitably slightly delay processing
6244 of other connections, and it can happen that request times in the order of
6245 a few tens of milliseconds are measured after a few thousands of new
6246 connections have been accepted at once.
6247
6248 - If "Tc" is close to 3000, a packet has probably been lost between the
6249 server and the proxy during the server connection phase. This value should
6250 always be very low, such as 1 ms on local networks and less than a few tens
6251 of ms on remote networks.
6252
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006253 - If "Tr" is nearly always lower than 3000 except some rare values which seem
6254 to be the average majored by 3000, there are probably some packets lost
6255 between the proxy and the server.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006256
6257 - If "Tt" is large even for small byte counts, it generally is because
6258 neither the client nor the server decides to close the connection, for
6259 instance because both have agreed on a keep-alive connection mode. In order
6260 to solve this issue, it will be needed to specify "option httpclose" on
6261 either the frontend or the backend. If the problem persists, it means that
6262 the server ignores the "close" connection mode and expects the client to
6263 close. Then it will be required to use "option forceclose". Having the
6264 smallest possible 'Tt' is important when connection regulation is used with
6265 the "maxconn" option on the servers, since no new connection will be sent
6266 to the server until another one is released.
6267
6268Other noticeable HTTP log cases ('xx' means any value to be ignored) :
6269
6270 Tq/Tw/Tc/Tr/+Tt The "option logasap" is present on the frontend and the log
6271 was emitted before the data phase. All the timers are valid
6272 except "Tt" which is shorter than reality.
6273
6274 -1/xx/xx/xx/Tt The client was not able to send a complete request in time
6275 or it aborted too early. Check the session termination flags
6276 then "timeout http-request" and "timeout client" settings.
6277
6278 Tq/-1/xx/xx/Tt It was not possible to process the request, maybe because
6279 servers were out of order, because the request was invalid
6280 or forbidden by ACL rules. Check the session termination
6281 flags.
6282
6283 Tq/Tw/-1/xx/Tt The connection could not establish on the server. Either it
6284 actively refused it or it timed out after Tt-(Tq+Tw) ms.
6285 Check the session termination flags, then check the
6286 "timeout connect" setting. Note that the tarpit action might
6287 return similar-looking patterns, with "Tw" equal to the time
6288 the client connection was maintained open.
6289
6290 Tq/Tw/Tc/-1/Tt The server has accepted the connection but did not return
6291 a complete response in time, or it closed its connexion
6292 unexpectedly after Tt-(Tq+Tw+Tc) ms. Check the session
6293 termination flags, then check the "timeout server" setting.
6294
6295
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020062968.5. Session state at disconnection
6297-----------------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006298
6299TCP and HTTP logs provide a session termination indicator in the
6300"termination_state" field, just before the number of active connections. It is
63012-characters long in TCP mode, and is extended to 4 characters in HTTP mode,
6302each of which has a special meaning :
6303
6304 - On the first character, a code reporting the first event which caused the
6305 session to terminate :
6306
6307 C : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the client.
6308
6309 S : the TCP session was unexpectedly aborted by the server, or the
6310 server explicitly refused it.
6311
6312 P : the session was prematurely aborted by the proxy, because of a
6313 connection limit enforcement, because a DENY filter was matched,
6314 because of a security check which detected and blocked a dangerous
6315 error in server response which might have caused information leak
6316 (eg: cacheable cookie), or because the response was processed by
6317 the proxy (redirect, stats, etc...).
6318
6319 R : a resource on the proxy has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source
6320 ports, ...). Usually, this appears during the connection phase, and
6321 system logs should contain a copy of the precise error. If this
6322 happens, it must be considered as a very serious anomaly which
6323 should be fixed as soon as possible by any means.
6324
6325 I : an internal error was identified by the proxy during a self-check.
6326 This should NEVER happen, and you are encouraged to report any log
6327 containing this, because this would almost certainly be a bug. It
6328 would be wise to preventively restart the process after such an
6329 event too, in case it would be caused by memory corruption.
6330
6331 c : the client-side timeout expired while waiting for the client to
6332 send or receive data.
6333
6334 s : the server-side timeout expired while waiting for the server to
6335 send or receive data.
6336
6337 - : normal session completion, both the client and the server closed
6338 with nothing left in the buffers.
6339
6340 - on the second character, the TCP or HTTP session state when it was closed :
6341
6342 R : th proxy was waiting for a complete, valid REQUEST from the client
6343 (HTTP mode only). Nothing was sent to any server.
6344
6345 Q : the proxy was waiting in the QUEUE for a connection slot. This can
6346 only happen when servers have a 'maxconn' parameter set. It can
6347 also happen in the global queue after a redispatch consecutive to
6348 a failed attempt to connect to a dying server. If no redispatch is
6349 reported, then no connection attempt was made to any server.
6350
6351 C : the proxy was waiting for the CONNECTION to establish on the
6352 server. The server might at most have noticed a connection attempt.
6353
6354 H : the proxy was waiting for complete, valid response HEADERS from the
6355 server (HTTP only).
6356
6357 D : the session was in the DATA phase.
6358
6359 L : the proxy was still transmitting LAST data to the client while the
6360 server had already finished. This one is very rare as it can only
6361 happen when the client dies while receiving the last packets.
6362
6363 T : the request was tarpitted. It has been held open with the client
6364 during the whole "timeout tarpit" duration or until the client
6365 closed, both of which will be reported in the "Tw" timer.
6366
6367 - : normal session completion after end of data transfer.
6368
6369 - the third character tells whether the persistence cookie was provided by
6370 the client (only in HTTP mode) :
6371
6372 N : the client provided NO cookie. This is usually the case for new
6373 visitors, so counting the number of occurrences of this flag in the
6374 logs generally indicate a valid trend for the site frequentation.
6375
6376 I : the client provided an INVALID cookie matching no known server.
6377 This might be caused by a recent configuration change, mixed
6378 cookies between HTTP/HTTPS sites, or an attack.
6379
6380 D : the client provided a cookie designating a server which was DOWN,
6381 so either "option persist" was used and the client was sent to
6382 this server, or it was not set and the client was redispatched to
6383 another server.
6384
6385 V : the client provided a valid cookie, and was sent to the associated
6386 server.
6387
6388 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
6389
6390 - the last character reports what operations were performed on the persistence
6391 cookie returned by the server (only in HTTP mode) :
6392
6393 N : NO cookie was provided by the server, and none was inserted either.
6394
6395 I : no cookie was provided by the server, and the proxy INSERTED one.
6396 Note that in "cookie insert" mode, if the server provides a cookie,
6397 it will still be overwritten and reported as "I" here.
6398
6399 P : a cookie was PROVIDED by the server and transmitted as-is.
6400
6401 R : the cookie provided by the server was REWRITTEN by the proxy, which
6402 happens in "cookie rewrite" or "cookie prefix" modes.
6403
6404 D : the cookie provided by the server was DELETED by the proxy.
6405
6406 - : does not apply (no cookie set in configuration).
6407
6408The combination of the two first flags give a lot of information about what was
6409happening when the session terminated, and why it did terminate. It can be
6410helpful to detect server saturation, network troubles, local system resource
6411starvation, attacks, etc...
6412
6413The most common termination flags combinations are indicated below. They are
6414alphabetically sorted, with the lowercase set just after the upper case for
6415easier finding and understanding.
6416
6417 Flags Reason
6418
6419 -- Normal termination.
6420
6421 CC The client aborted before the connection could be established to the
6422 server. This can happen when haproxy tries to connect to a recently
6423 dead (or unchecked) server, and the client aborts while haproxy is
6424 waiting for the server to respond or for "timeout connect" to expire.
6425
6426 CD The client unexpectedly aborted during data transfer. This can be
6427 caused by a browser crash, by an intermediate equipment between the
6428 client and haproxy which decided to actively break the connection,
6429 by network routing issues between the client and haproxy, or by a
6430 keep-alive session between the server and the client terminated first
6431 by the client.
6432
6433 cD The client did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
6434 "timeout client" delay. This is often caused by network failures on
6435 the client side, or the client simply leaving the net uncleanly.
6436
6437 CH The client aborted while waiting for the server to start responding.
6438 It might be the server taking too long to respond or the client
6439 clicking the 'Stop' button too fast.
6440
6441 cH The "timeout client" stroke while waiting for client data during a
6442 POST request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values
6443 for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized packets. It can
6444 also happen when client timeout is smaller than server timeout and
6445 the server takes too long to respond.
6446
6447 CQ The client aborted while its session was queued, waiting for a server
6448 with enough empty slots to accept it. It might be that either all the
6449 servers were saturated or that the assigned server was taking too
6450 long a time to respond.
6451
6452 CR The client aborted before sending a full HTTP request. Most likely
6453 the request was typed by hand using a telnet client, and aborted
6454 too early. The HTTP status code is likely a 400 here. Sometimes this
6455 might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection between haproxy
6456 and the client.
6457
6458 cR The "timeout http-request" stroke before the client sent a full HTTP
6459 request. This is sometimes caused by too large TCP MSS values on the
6460 client side for PPPoE networks which cannot transport full-sized
6461 packets, or by clients sending requests by hand and not typing fast
6462 enough, or forgetting to enter the empty line at the end of the
6463 request. The HTTP status code is likely a 408 here.
6464
6465 CT The client aborted while its session was tarpitted. It is important to
6466 check if this happens on valid requests, in order to be sure that no
Willy Tarreau55165fe2009-05-10 12:02:55 +02006467 wrong tarpit rules have been written. If a lot of them happen, it
6468 might make sense to lower the "timeout tarpit" value to something
6469 closer to the average reported "Tw" timer, in order not to consume
6470 resources for just a few attackers.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006471
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006472 SC The server or an equipment between it and haproxy explicitly refused
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006473 the TCP connection (the proxy received a TCP RST or an ICMP message
6474 in return). Under some circumstances, it can also be the network
6475 stack telling the proxy that the server is unreachable (eg: no route,
6476 or no ARP response on local network). When this happens in HTTP mode,
6477 the status code is likely a 502 or 503 here.
6478
6479 sC The "timeout connect" stroke before a connection to the server could
6480 complete. When this happens in HTTP mode, the status code is likely a
6481 503 or 504 here.
6482
6483 SD The connection to the server died with an error during the data
6484 transfer. This usually means that haproxy has received an RST from
6485 the server or an ICMP message from an intermediate equipment while
6486 exchanging data with the server. This can be caused by a server crash
6487 or by a network issue on an intermediate equipment.
6488
6489 sD The server did not send nor acknowledge any data for as long as the
6490 "timeout server" setting during the data phase. This is often caused
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006491 by too short timeouts on L4 equipments before the server (firewalls,
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006492 load-balancers, ...), as well as keep-alive sessions maintained
6493 between the client and the server expiring first on haproxy.
6494
6495 SH The server aborted before sending its full HTTP response headers, or
6496 it crashed while processing the request. Since a server aborting at
6497 this moment is very rare, it would be wise to inspect its logs to
6498 control whether it crashed and why. The logged request may indicate a
6499 small set of faulty requests, demonstrating bugs in the application.
6500 Sometimes this might also be caused by an IDS killing the connection
6501 between haproxy and the server.
6502
6503 sH The "timeout server" stroke before the server could return its
6504 response headers. This is the most common anomaly, indicating too
6505 long transactions, probably caused by server or database saturation.
6506 The immediate workaround consists in increasing the "timeout server"
6507 setting, but it is important to keep in mind that the user experience
6508 will suffer from these long response times. The only long term
6509 solution is to fix the application.
6510
6511 sQ The session spent too much time in queue and has been expired. See
6512 the "timeout queue" and "timeout connect" settings to find out how to
6513 fix this if it happens too often. If it often happens massively in
6514 short periods, it may indicate general problems on the affected
6515 servers due to I/O or database congestion, or saturation caused by
6516 external attacks.
6517
6518 PC The proxy refused to establish a connection to the server because the
6519 process' socket limit has been reached while attempting to connect.
6520 The global "maxconn" parameter may be increased in the configuration
6521 so that it does not happen anymore. This status is very rare and
6522 might happen when the global "ulimit-n" parameter is forced by hand.
6523
6524 PH The proxy blocked the server's response, because it was invalid,
6525 incomplete, dangerous (cache control), or matched a security filter.
6526 In any case, an HTTP 502 error is sent to the client. One possible
6527 cause for this error is an invalid syntax in an HTTP header name
6528 containing unauthorized characters.
6529
6530 PR The proxy blocked the client's HTTP request, either because of an
6531 invalid HTTP syntax, in which case it returned an HTTP 400 error to
6532 the client, or because a deny filter matched, in which case it
6533 returned an HTTP 403 error.
6534
6535 PT The proxy blocked the client's request and has tarpitted its
6536 connection before returning it a 500 server error. Nothing was sent
6537 to the server. The connection was maintained open for as long as
6538 reported by the "Tw" timer field.
6539
6540 RC A local resource has been exhausted (memory, sockets, source ports)
6541 preventing the connection to the server from establishing. The error
6542 logs will tell precisely what was missing. This is very rare and can
6543 only be solved by proper system tuning.
6544
6545
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065468.6. Non-printable characters
6547-----------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006548
6549In order not to cause trouble to log analysis tools or terminals during log
6550consulting, non-printable characters are not sent as-is into log files, but are
6551converted to the two-digits hexadecimal representation of their ASCII code,
6552prefixed by the character '#'. The only characters that can be logged without
6553being escaped are comprised between 32 and 126 (inclusive). Obviously, the
6554escape character '#' itself is also encoded to avoid any ambiguity ("#23"). It
6555is the same for the character '"' which becomes "#22", as well as '{', '|' and
6556'}' when logging headers.
6557
6558Note that the space character (' ') is not encoded in headers, which can cause
6559issues for tools relying on space count to locate fields. A typical header
6560containing spaces is "User-Agent".
6561
6562Last, it has been observed that some syslog daemons such as syslog-ng escape
6563the quote ('"') with a backslash ('\'). The reverse operation can safely be
6564performed since no quote may appear anywhere else in the logs.
6565
6566
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065678.7. Capturing HTTP cookies
6568---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006569
6570Cookie capture simplifies the tracking a complete user session. This can be
6571achieved using the "capture cookie" statement in the frontend. Please refer to
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006572section 4.2 for more details. Only one cookie can be captured, and the same
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006573cookie will simultaneously be checked in the request ("Cookie:" header) and in
6574the response ("Set-Cookie:" header). The respective values will be reported in
6575the HTTP logs at the "captured_request_cookie" and "captured_response_cookie"
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006576locations (see section 8.2.3 about HTTP log format). When either cookie is
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006577not seen, a dash ('-') replaces the value. This way, it's easy to detect when a
6578user switches to a new session for example, because the server will reassign it
6579a new cookie. It is also possible to detect if a server unexpectedly sets a
6580wrong cookie to a client, leading to session crossing.
6581
6582 Examples :
6583 # capture the first cookie whose name starts with "ASPSESSION"
6584 capture cookie ASPSESSION len 32
6585
6586 # capture the first cookie whose name is exactly "vgnvisitor"
6587 capture cookie vgnvisitor= len 32
6588
6589
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020065908.8. Capturing HTTP headers
6591---------------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006592
6593Header captures are useful to track unique request identifiers set by an upper
6594proxy, virtual host names, user-agents, POST content-length, referrers, etc. In
6595the response, one can search for information about the response length, how the
6596server asked the cache to behave, or an object location during a redirection.
6597
6598Header captures are performed using the "capture request header" and "capture
6599response header" statements in the frontend. Please consult their definition in
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006600section 4.2 for more details.
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006601
6602It is possible to include both request headers and response headers at the same
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006603time. Non-existent headers are logged as empty strings, and if one header
6604appears more than once, only its last occurrence will be logged. Request headers
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006605are grouped within braces '{' and '}' in the same order as they were declared,
6606and delimited with a vertical bar '|' without any space. Response headers
6607follow the same representation, but are displayed after a space following the
6608request headers block. These blocks are displayed just before the HTTP request
6609in the logs.
6610
6611 Example :
6612 # This instance chains to the outgoing proxy
6613 listen proxy-out
6614 mode http
6615 option httplog
6616 option logasap
6617 log global
6618 server cache1 192.168.1.1:3128
6619
6620 # log the name of the virtual server
6621 capture request header Host len 20
6622
6623 # log the amount of data uploaded during a POST
6624 capture request header Content-Length len 10
6625
6626 # log the beginning of the referrer
6627 capture request header Referer len 20
6628
6629 # server name (useful for outgoing proxies only)
6630 capture response header Server len 20
6631
6632 # logging the content-length is useful with "option logasap"
6633 capture response header Content-Length len 10
6634
6635 # log the expected cache behaviour on the response
6636 capture response header Cache-Control len 8
6637
6638 # the Via header will report the next proxy's name
6639 capture response header Via len 20
6640
6641 # log the URL location during a redirection
6642 capture response header Location len 20
6643
6644 >>> Aug 9 20:26:09 localhost \
6645 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34014 [09/Aug/2004:20:26:09] proxy-out \
6646 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/162/+162 200 +350 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
6647 {fr.adserver.yahoo.co||http://fr.f416.mail.} {|864|private||} \
6648 "GET http://fr.adserver.yahoo.com/"
6649
6650 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
6651 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34020 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
6652 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/0/182/+182 200 +279 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
6653 {w.ods.org||} {Formilux/0.1.8|3495|||} \
6654 "GET http://trafic.1wt.eu/ HTTP/1.1"
6655
6656 >>> Aug 9 20:30:46 localhost \
6657 haproxy[2022]: 127.0.0.1:34028 [09/Aug/2004:20:30:46] proxy-out \
6658 proxy-out/cache1 0/0/2/126/+128 301 +223 - - ---- 0/0/0/0/0 0/0 \
6659 {www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr||http://trafic.1wt.eu/} \
6660 {Apache|230|||http://www.sytadin.} \
6661 "GET http://www.sytadin.equipement.gouv.fr/ HTTP/1.1"
6662
6663
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020066648.9. Examples of logs
6665---------------------
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006666
6667These are real-world examples of logs accompanied with an explanation. Some of
6668them have been made up by hand. The syslog part has been removed for better
6669reading. Their sole purpose is to explain how to decipher them.
6670
6671 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33318 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.130] px-http \
6672 px-http/srv1 6559/0/7/147/6723 200 243 - - ---- 5/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
6673 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
6674
6675 => long request (6.5s) entered by hand through 'telnet'. The server replied
6676 in 147 ms, and the session ended normally ('----')
6677
6678 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33319 [15/Oct/2003:08:31:57.149] px-http \
6679 px-http/srv1 6559/1230/7/147/6870 200 243 - - ---- 324/239/239/99/0 \
6680 0/9 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
6681
6682 => Idem, but the request was queued in the global queue behind 9 other
6683 requests, and waited there for 1230 ms.
6684
6685 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.654] px-http \
6686 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/+30 200 +243 - - ---- 3/3/3/1/0 0/0 \
6687 "GET /image.iso HTTP/1.0"
6688
6689 => request for a long data transfer. The "logasap" option was specified, so
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006690 the log was produced just before transferring data. The server replied in
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006691 14 ms, 243 bytes of headers were sent to the client, and total time from
6692 accept to first data byte is 30 ms.
6693
6694 >>> haproxy[674]: 127.0.0.1:33320 [15/Oct/2003:08:32:17.925] px-http \
6695 px-http/srv1 9/0/7/14/30 502 243 - - PH-- 3/2/2/0/0 0/0 \
6696 "GET /cgi-bin/bug.cgi? HTTP/1.0"
6697
6698 => the proxy blocked a server response either because of an "rspdeny" or
6699 "rspideny" filter, or because the response was improperly formatted and
6700 not HTTP-compliant, or because it blocked sensible information which
6701 risked being cached. In this case, the response is replaced with a "502
6702 bad gateway". The flags ("PH--") tell us that it was haproxy who decided
6703 to return the 502 and not the server.
6704
6705 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34548 [15/Oct/2003:15:18:55.798] px-http \
6706 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/8490 -1 0 - - CR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
6707
6708 => the client never completed its request and aborted itself ("C---") after
6709 8.5s, while the proxy was waiting for the request headers ("-R--").
6710 Nothing was sent to any server.
6711
6712 >>> haproxy[18113]: 127.0.0.1:34549 [15/Oct/2003:15:19:06.103] px-http \
6713 px-http/<NOSRV> -1/-1/-1/-1/50001 408 0 - - cR-- 2/2/2/0/0 0/0 ""
6714
6715 => The client never completed its request, which was aborted by the
6716 time-out ("c---") after 50s, while the proxy was waiting for the request
6717 headers ("-R--"). Nothing was sent to any server, but the proxy could
6718 send a 408 return code to the client.
6719
6720 >>> haproxy[18989]: 127.0.0.1:34550 [15/Oct/2003:15:24:28.312] px-tcp \
6721 px-tcp/srv1 0/0/5007 0 cD 0/0/0/0/0 0/0
6722
6723 => This log was produced with "option tcplog". The client timed out after
6724 5 seconds ("c----").
6725
6726 >>> haproxy[18989]: 10.0.0.1:34552 [15/Oct/2003:15:26:31.462] px-http \
6727 px-http/srv1 3183/-1/-1/-1/11215 503 0 - - SC-- 205/202/202/115/3 \
6728 0/0 "HEAD / HTTP/1.0"
6729
6730 => The request took 3s to complete (probably a network problem), and the
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006731 connection to the server failed ('SC--') after 4 attempts of 2 seconds
Willy Tarreaucc6c8912009-02-22 10:53:55 +01006732 (config says 'retries 3'), and no redispatch (otherwise we would have
6733 seen "/+3"). Status code 503 was returned to the client. There were 115
6734 connections on this server, 202 connections on this proxy, and 205 on
6735 the global process. It is possible that the server refused the
6736 connection because of too many already established.
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006737
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01006738
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020067399. Statistics and monitoring
6740----------------------------
6741
6742It is possible to query HAProxy about its status. The most commonly used
6743mechanism is the HTTP statistics page. This page also exposes an alternative
6744CSV output format for monitoring tools. The same format is provided on the
6745Unix socket.
6746
6747
67489.1. CSV format
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01006749---------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01006750
Willy Tarreau7f062c42009-03-05 18:43:00 +01006751The statistics may be consulted either from the unix socket or from the HTTP
6752page. Both means provide a CSV format whose fields follow.
6753
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01006754 0. pxname: proxy name
6755 1. svname: service name (FRONTEND for frontend, BACKEND for backend, any name
6756 for server)
6757 2. qcur: current queued requests
6758 3. qmax: max queued requests
6759 4. scur: current sessions
6760 5. smax: max sessions
6761 6. slim: sessions limit
6762 7. stot: total sessions
6763 8. bin: bytes in
6764 9. bout: bytes out
6765 10. dreq: denied requests
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01006766 11. dresp: denied responses
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01006767 12. ereq: request errors
6768 13. econ: connection errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01006769 14. eresp: response errors
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif58a9622008-02-23 01:19:10 +01006770 15. wretr: retries (warning)
6771 16. wredis: redispatches (warning)
6772 17. status: status (UP/DOWN/...)
6773 18. weight: server weight (server), total weight (backend)
6774 19. act: server is active (server), number of active servers (backend)
6775 20. bck: server is backup (server), number of backup servers (backend)
6776 21. chkfail: number of failed checks
6777 22. chkdown: number of UP->DOWN transitions
6778 23. lastchg: last status change (in seconds)
6779 24. downtime: total downtime (in seconds)
6780 25. qlimit: queue limit
6781 26. pid: process id (0 for first instance, 1 for second, ...)
6782 27. iid: unique proxy id
6783 28. sid: service id (unique inside a proxy)
6784 29. throttle: warm up status
6785 30. lbtot: total number of times a server was selected
6786 31. tracked: id of proxy/server if tracking is enabled
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkiaeebf9b2009-10-04 15:43:17 +02006787 32. type (0=frontend, 1=backend, 2=server, 3=socket)
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkidb57c6b2009-08-31 21:23:27 +02006788 33. rate: number of sessions per second over last elapsed second
6789 34. rate_lim: limit on new sessions per second
6790 35. rate_max: max number of new sessions per second
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki09605412009-09-23 22:09:24 +02006791 36. check_status: status of last health check, one of:
6792 UNK -> unknown
6793 INI -> initializing
6794 SOCKERR -> socket error
6795 L4OK -> check passed on layer 4, no upper layers testing enabled
6796 L4TMOUT -> layer 1-4 timeout
6797 L4CON -> layer 1-4 connection problem, for example "Connection refused"
6798 (tcp rst) or "No route to host" (icmp)
6799 L6OK -> check passed on layer 6
6800 L6TOUT -> layer 6 (SSL) timeout
6801 L6RSP -> layer 6 invalid response - protocol error
6802 L7OK -> check passed on layer 7
6803 L7OKC -> check conditionally passed on layer 7, for example 404 with
6804 disable-on-404
6805 L7TOUT -> layer 7 (HTTP/SMTP) timeout
6806 L7RSP -> layer 7 invalid response - protocol error
6807 L7STS -> layer 7 response error, for example HTTP 5xx
6808 37. check_code: layer5-7 code, if available
6809 38. check_duration: time in ms took to finish last health check
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006810 39. hrsp_1xx: http responses with 1xx code
6811 40. hrsp_2xx: http responses with 2xx code
6812 41. hrsp_3xx: http responses with 3xx code
6813 42. hrsp_4xx: http responses with 4xx code
6814 43. hrsp_5xx: http responses with 5xx code
6815 44. hrsp_other: http responses with other codes (protocol error)
Willy Tarreau844e3c52008-01-11 16:28:18 +01006816
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01006817
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +020068189.2. Unix Socket commands
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01006819-------------------------
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01006820
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01006821The following commands are supported on the UNIX stats socket ; all of them
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02006822must be terminated by a line feed. The socket supports pipelining, so that it
6823is possible to chain multiple commands at once provided they are delimited by
6824a semi-colon or a line feed, although the former is more reliable as it has no
6825risk of being truncated over the network. The responses themselves will each be
6826followed by an empty line, so it will be easy for an external script to match a
6827given response with a given request. By default one command line is processed
6828then the connection closes, but there is an interactive allowing multiple lines
6829to be issued one at a time.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01006830
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02006831It is important to understand that when multiple haproxy processes are started
6832on the same sockets, any process may pick up the request and will output its
6833own stats.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01006834
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02006835help
6836 Print the list of known keywords and their basic usage. The same help screen
6837 is also displayed for unknown commands.
Willy Tarreau3dfe6cd2008-12-07 22:29:48 +01006838
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02006839prompt
6840 Toggle the prompt at the beginning of the line and enter or leave interactive
6841 mode. In interactive mode, the connection is not closed after a command
6842 completes. Instead, the prompt will appear again, indicating the user that
6843 the interpreter is waiting for a new command. The prompt consists in a right
6844 angle bracket followed by a space "> ". This mode is particularly convenient
6845 when one wants to periodically check information such as stats or errors.
6846 It is also a good idea to enter interactive mode before issuing a "help"
6847 command.
6848
6849quit
6850 Close the connection when in interactive mode.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01006851
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01006852show errors [<iid>]
6853 Dump last known request and response errors collected by frontends and
6854 backends. If <iid> is specified, the limit the dump to errors concerning
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02006855 either frontend or backend whose ID is <iid>. This command is restricted
6856 and can only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or
6857 "admin".
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01006858
6859 The errors which may be collected are the last request and response errors
6860 caused by protocol violations, often due to invalid characters in header
6861 names. The report precisely indicates what exact character violated the
6862 protocol. Other important information such as the exact date the error was
6863 detected, frontend and backend names, the server name (when known), the
6864 internal session ID and the source address which has initiated the session
6865 are reported too.
6866
6867 All characters are returned, and non-printable characters are encoded. The
6868 most common ones (\t = 9, \n = 10, \r = 13 and \e = 27) are encoded as one
6869 letter following a backslash. The backslash itself is encoded as '\\' to
6870 avoid confusion. Other non-printable characters are encoded '\xNN' where
6871 NN is the two-digits hexadecimal representation of the character's ASCII
6872 code.
6873
6874 Lines are prefixed with the position of their first character, starting at 0
6875 for the beginning of the buffer. At most one input line is printed per line,
6876 and large lines will be broken into multiple consecutive output lines so that
6877 the output never goes beyond 79 characters wide. It is easy to detect if a
6878 line was broken, because it will not end with '\n' and the next line's offset
6879 will be followed by a '+' sign, indicating it is a continuation of previous
6880 line.
6881
6882 Example :
6883 >>> $ echo "show errors" | socat stdio /tmp/sock1
6884 [04/Mar/2009:15:46:56.081] backend http-in (#2) : invalid response
6885 src 127.0.0.1, session #54, frontend fe-eth0 (#1), server s2 (#1)
6886 response length 213 bytes, error at position 23:
6887
6888 00000 HTTP/1.0 200 OK\r\n
6889 00017 header/bizarre:blah\r\n
6890 00038 Location: blah\r\n
6891 00054 Long-line: this is a very long line which should b
6892 00104+ e broken into multiple lines on the output buffer,
6893 00154+ otherwise it would be too large to print in a ter
6894 00204+ minal\r\n
6895 00211 \r\n
6896
Willy Tarreauc57f0e22009-05-10 13:12:33 +02006897 In the example above, we see that the backend "http-in" which has internal
Willy Tarreaue0c8a1a2009-03-04 16:33:10 +01006898 ID 2 has blocked an invalid response from its server s2 which has internal
6899 ID 1. The request was on session 54 initiated by source 127.0.0.1 and
6900 received by frontend fe-eth0 whose ID is 1. The total response length was
6901 213 bytes when the error was detected, and the error was at byte 23. This
6902 is the slash ('/') in header name "header/bizarre", which is not a valid
6903 HTTP character for a header name.
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki2c6962c2008-03-02 02:42:14 +01006904
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02006905show info
6906 Dump info about haproxy status on current process.
6907
6908show sess
6909 Dump all known sessions. Avoid doing this on slow connections as this can
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02006910 be huge. This command is restricted and can only be issued on sockets
6911 configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
6912
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02006913
6914show stat [<iid> <type> <sid>]
6915 Dump statistics in the CSV format. By passing <id>, <type> and <sid>, it is
6916 possible to dump only selected items :
6917 - <iid> is a proxy ID, -1 to dump everything
6918 - <type> selects the type of dumpable objects : 1 for frontends, 2 for
6919 backends, 4 for servers, -1 for everything. These values can be ORed,
6920 for example:
6921 1 + 2 = 3 -> frontend + backend.
6922 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 -> frontend + backend + server.
6923 - <sid> is a server ID, -1 to dump everything from the selected proxy.
6924
6925 Example :
6926 >>> $ echo "show info;show stat" | socat stdio unix-connect:/tmp/sock1
6927 Name: HAProxy
6928 Version: 1.4-dev2-49
6929 Release_date: 2009/09/23
6930 Nbproc: 1
6931 Process_num: 1
6932 (...)
6933
6934 # pxname,svname,qcur,qmax,scur,smax,slim,stot,bin,bout,dreq, (...)
6935 stats,FRONTEND,,,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,0,,,,,OPEN,,,,,,,,,1,1,0, (...)
6936 stats,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,0,0,0,,0,250,(...)
6937 (...)
6938 www1,BACKEND,0,0,0,0,1000,0,0,0,0,0,,0,0,0,0,UP,1,1,0,,0,250, (...)
6939
6940 $
6941
6942 Here, two commands have been issued at once. That way it's easy to find
6943 which process the stats apply to in multi-process mode. Notice the empty
6944 line after the information output which marks the end of the first block.
6945 A similar empty line appears at the end of the second block (stats) so that
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzkif8645332009-12-13 21:55:50 +01006946 the reader knows the output has not been truncated.
Willy Tarreau9a42c0d2009-09-22 19:31:03 +02006947
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02006948clear counters
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02006949 Clear the max values of the statistics counters in each proxy (frontend &
6950 backend) and in each server. The cumulated counters are not affected. This
6951 can be used to get clean counters after an incident, without having to
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02006952 restart nor to clear traffic counters. This command is restricted and can
6953 only be issued on sockets configured for levels "operator" or "admin".
Willy Tarreau2f6bf2b2009-10-10 15:26:26 +02006954
6955clear counters all
6956 Clear all statistics counters in each proxy (frontend & backend) and in each
Willy Tarreau6162db22009-10-10 17:13:00 +02006957 server. This has the same effect as restarting. This command is restricted
6958 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin".
6959
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02006960get weight <backend>/<server>
6961 Report the current weight and the initial weight of server <server> in
6962 backend <backend> or an error if either doesn't exist. The initial weight is
6963 the one that appears in the configuration file. Both are normally equal
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02006964 unless the current weight has been changed. Both the backend and the server
6965 may be specified either by their name or by their numeric ID, prefixed with a
6966 dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau38338fa2009-10-10 18:37:29 +02006967
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02006968set weight <backend>/<server> <weight>[%]
6969 Change a server's weight to the value passed in argument. If the value ends
6970 with the '%' sign, then the new weight will be relative to the initially
6971 configured weight. Relative weights are only permitted between 0 and 100%,
6972 and absolute weights are permitted between 0 and 256. Servers which are part
6973 of a farm running a static load-balancing algorithm have stricter limitations
6974 because the weight cannot change once set. Thus for these servers, the only
6975 accepted values are 0 and 100% (or 0 and the initial weight). Changes take
6976 effect immediately, though certain LB algorithms require a certain amount of
6977 requests to consider changes. A typical usage of this command is to disable
6978 a server during an update by setting its weight to zero, then to enable it
6979 again after the update by setting it back to 100%. This command is restricted
Willy Tarreaucfeaa472009-10-10 22:33:08 +02006980 and can only be issued on sockets configured for level "admin". Both the
6981 backend and the server may be specified either by their name or by their
6982 numeric ID, prefixed with a dash ('#').
Willy Tarreau4483d432009-10-10 19:30:08 +02006983
Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki719e7262009-10-04 15:02:46 +02006984
Willy Tarreau0ba27502007-12-24 16:55:16 +01006985/*
6986 * Local variables:
6987 * fill-column: 79
6988 * End:
6989 */